JP7225044B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

As a game machine, there is a game machine capable of executing a suggestive performance suggesting control to be in an advantageous state and a preparatory performance for notifying that the suggestive performance will be executed before the suggestive performance is executed. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes an effect of stocking (displaying) arrows that change the pending display around the pending display.

JP 2017-131277 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is a possibility that the interest may rather decrease due to the execution of another effect during the execution of the effect that raises the degree of expectation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that can maintain interest.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a detection means capable of detecting the action of the player;
promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect to promote a specific action of the player;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed;
The suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect, and a different suggestive effect from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect. a third suggestive effect in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is lower than that of the second suggestive effect,
The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed,
The third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel and independently of each other during the same period,
The preparation effect execution means is capable of executing the first preparation effect with a first pattern and a second pattern having a lower rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first pattern when executed,
The first preparation effect and the third suggestive effect of the first pattern can be executed in parallel during the same period, while the first preparation effect and the third suggestive effect of the second pattern can be executed in parallel during the same period. and do not run
The third suggestion is higher when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. The production is easy to execute,
The promotion effect execution means is capable of executing the promotion effect in one of a plurality of effect modes including special modes.
It is characterized by
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A suggestive effect execution means that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that suggests that it will be controlled, and a suggestive effect is executed before the suggestive effect is executed. and a preparation effect execution means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the , a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, and a third suggesting effect (for example, a chance notice effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect. , The preparation effects include a first preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed (for example, , timer preparation effects, etc.), and the third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 9-11 (A1) and (A2)). , the third suggestion effect is executed more when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. Detecting means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) capable of detecting actions of the player (for example, see FIGS. 9-10), and specific display capable of displaying specific display corresponding to variable display means (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first reservation display area 87AKB1, second reservation display area 87AKB2, etc.); Effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051, etc.), and action effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS053 of the effect process during variable display, etc.) capable of executing action effects based on the detection result of the detection means. ), and predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of variable display (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS049 of effect processing during variable display), and the specific display means is a specific mode (for example, red display using the display image 87AKC4). The specific display can be displayed in any one of the display modes (for example, display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4), and the promotion effect execution means is a special mode (for example, a large V-converter using the display image 87AKF3 display, etc.) (for example, the size of the V-con display corresponding to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3, etc.). For example, using the display image 87AKE3, "Gekietsu! ! , etc.) (for example, messages corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3). , the predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined mode (see, for example, the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41 in FIGS. 11-12), and the promotion effect is performed in the special mode at a different rate according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect. is executed (for example, refer to the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect corresponding to the cut-in effect in FIGS. 11-13), and is controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (for example, FIG. 11- 13 (see example 87AK51 of determination of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in 13).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest. Also, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed in different periods (for example, after the execution of the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed) , a timer preparation effect is executed (see FIG. 9-7(D)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the first suggestive effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes (e.g., first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), third effect mode). (red), etc. See FIG. 9-3 (A)), and the first preparation effect has a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (Large effect), etc. See FIG. 9-3 (B)), and depending on which production mode the first preparation production is executed, the executable first suggestion production Effect mode is different (for example, when the pending display notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the pending display notice effect is executed by one of the first to third effect modes, and the second effect mode When the pending display advance notice preparation effect is executed, the pending display advance notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above, the suggestive effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect (for example, if a pending display notice effect or a timer effect is executed When it is determined, it may be determined that the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect are not executed.See Fig. 9-3 (B), Fig. 9-4 (B)), whether an uncorresponding preparation effect has been executed Depending on whether or not, the ease of execution differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the result of determination at the time of winning is a big hit, it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. Also, as shown in Figure 9-4, it is easy to determine if the timer effect is also executed.However, it may be determined that the timer preparation effect is not executed.Then, the pending display advance notice preparation effect that does not correspond to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is not executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above, depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed, the ratio of which suggestive effect of the effect mode is executed differs (for example, When the performance mode of the pending display advance notice effect and the timer preparation effect is determined to be the second effect mode, the ratio of deciding to execute the suspension display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect compared to the case of determining the first effect mode. is high (see FIGS. 9-3(B) and 9-4(B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to gaming machines of the following (6) to (13). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, when a player operates a button during an operation valid period, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-164504, the degree of expectation of a big hit has been changed according to the mode of display and production. I had something to do. In such a gaming machine, the degree of expectation for a big win only differs depending on the mode of display and presentation when operated by the player, and it is difficult to appropriately raise the expectation of the player through presentation. In view of this point, it is desired to provide a gaming machine that appropriately heightens the player's sense of expectation through presentation and enhances the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine (6) is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. Detectable detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) and specific display means (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first reserved display area 87AKB1, second reserved display area 87AKB1, second reserved display area 87AKB2, etc.), promotion effect execution means capable of executing promotion effects that promote the action of the player (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display), and detection of the detection means Action effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS053 of effect processing during variable display) capable of executing action effect based on the result, and predetermined effect execution capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of variable display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS049 of effect processing during variable display), and the specific display means has a plurality of display modes including a specific mode (for example, red display using display image 87AKC4) (For example, display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, etc.) can display the specific display, and the promotion effect execution means can display a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, etc.) ) (for example, the size of the V-con display corresponding to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3). using the image 87AKE3, such as a message of "hot!" Depending on the display mode of the display, the predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined mode at a different rate (see, for example, cut-in effect determination example 87AK41 in FIGS. 11-12), and depending on the effect mode of the predetermined effect, The promotion effect is executed according to the special mode at a ratio (see, for example, the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect corresponding to the cut-in effect in FIGS. 11 to 13), and the advantageous effect is given at a different rate according to the effect mode of the promotion effect. state controlled (eg variable display results in FIGS. 11-13). (Refer to example 87AK51 for determination of promotion effect according to result).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the action effect is executed by the action effect execution means, the predetermined effect is performed by the predetermined effect execution means. (see, for example, FIG. 11-9 (B3)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, in response to the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, during the cut-in effect at the second timing in FIG. 11-9 (B3)), the specific display It may be possible to change the display mode.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(9) In any one of the gaming machines from (6) to (8) above, depending on which of the plurality of presentation modes the predetermined presentation is executed (for example, the display image 87AKE1 in the cut-in presentation decision example 87AK41 to 87 AKE3), it may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display at different rates.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (6) to (9), before execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means, corresponding to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode (For example, when the first timing is determined to be the variation pattern 87AKP1-3 in the determination example 87AK22 of the variation pattern), it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (10) above, setting means (for example, FIG. 10-6 and the CPU 103 for executing the set value change process of step S6A in step S6A), and the specific display may be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (11) above, setting means (for example, FIG. 10-6 such as the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in step S6A), and the predetermined effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (12) above, setting means (for example, FIG. 10-6 CPU 103 etc. that executes the set value change process of step S6A in step S6A), and the promotion effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means (for example, FIG. 87AK61, etc.).
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows a receiving command buffer at the time of dynamic winning. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of a display pattern of a pre-reading advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of effects to be executed as suggestive effects during the rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect patterns of the big hit suggestive effects and setting suggestive effects to be executed as the suggestive effects during the rear variable display. be. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the front variable display suggesting performance when execution of the big hit suggesting performance is determined, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution of the set suggesting performance is determined. (C) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of effects to be executed as suggestive effects during variable front display in the case, and (C) is a diagram showing effect patterns of character effects and timer effects executed as suggestive effects during variable front display, (D) is a diagram showing the degree of expectation for a big hit of the character effect and the timer effect and the degree of execution expectation of the setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing execution determination ratios and execution expectations of setting suggestion effects as suggestive effects during front variable display of character effects and timer effects in a modification; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending memory display and effect images in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion production|presentation by the variable display of normal reach in a modification, non-shortening non-reach, and shortening non-reach. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display advance notice effect determination table and a pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table and a timer advance notice preparation effect determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye announcement effect determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice execution processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution timings of a pending display notice effect (preparation effect) and a timer effect (preparation effect); FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect; It is a flow chart which shows an example of a chance notice setting process. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance prediction execution propriety determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the chance eye advance notice effect; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern determination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an active display and an example of suggestive effects; It is a figure which shows the cut-in production example and the promotion production example. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production decision processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of a final display image; It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a change pattern, etc. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination regarding suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of cut-in production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of an promotion effect related to a characterizing portion 87AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of an promotion effect related to a characteristic portion 88AK; It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the promotion production|presentation based on characteristic part 89AK. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the promotion production|presentation used as a modification. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)

A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols not yet stopped and displayed are variably displayed. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is a "small hit", the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined small winning combination (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a big hit combination ("no reach"). ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".
(Description of Characteristic Portion 153SG)

Next, the game machine in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-31.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 153SG001a formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (frame) 153SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In addition, in the game machine frame 153SG003, a glass door frame 153SG003a having a glass window is positioned around the left side between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 153SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 153SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 153SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the batted ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 153SG002R is the left game area 153SG002L by the operation of the batted ball operation handle 30. This is the game area in which a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 153SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 153SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 153SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general game area 153SG002R from upstream to downstream of the right game area 153SG002R. A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can win the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

In addition, a first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 153SG005U are set on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is accommodated in a substrate case 153SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 153SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 153SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 153SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 153SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also

A setting-switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting-switching switch 153SG052, is accommodated in the substrate case 153SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting-switching switch 153SG052 are housed in the substrate case 153SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 153SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 153SG201.

Since the substrate case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 153SG003 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 153SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 153SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch that can execute switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, with a setting key. In the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 153SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 153SG201. The display monitor 153SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 153SG201. That is, the display monitor 153SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 153SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 153SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st pending display capable of displaying the number of first pending memories device 153SG025A, second reservation display 153SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 153SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 153SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation storage, A round display 153SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and in a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 153SG002R. A game information display unit 153SG200 is provided in which a right hitting lamp 153SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 153SG133 that lights in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 153SG134 that lights in the high base state (short time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A uses two types of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 153SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 153SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 153SG025A and the second suspension display 153SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 153SG025A and second pending display 153SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the part 153SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 153SG025A is lit and the second pending When the two LEDs on the left of the display 153SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 153SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

It should be noted that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 153SG321 and a second movable body 153SG322 that can move between the origin position and the effect position during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 153SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 153SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 153SG321, and the second movable body 153SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 153SG322. An origin detection sensor 153SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 153SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol specifying command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, etc.) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 8-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variation patterns of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special design) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special design) shown in Fig. 8-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 8-7(A) and 8-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is defined as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot game state will be higher (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figure 8-8 (A) and Figure 8-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) stored in ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a hit type determination random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-9. In the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and the jackpot game. A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the state shifts to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big win game state by the "big win C" is a normal open big win in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the big win game state ends. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening , regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the variation pattern for the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern for the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot. A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are the normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1 -1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). assigned.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), 1 to 200 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are fluctuations of the normal reach jackpot. It is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1- 3).

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and 2 or more are provided as a small hit variation pattern. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation within the range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage number in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 is super reach α. , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of Super Reach β.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation.

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach deviation (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation pattern of deviation (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation D (high base medium), out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are non-reach deviation fluctuations It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2-2) , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α deviation fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviations, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio, so the variable display by the variation pattern of super reach is not executed. It is possible to prevent the effect from decreasing.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern as the loss variation pattern are completely the same between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is not a thing, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(A), the display monitor 153SG029 includes a first display section 153SG029A, a second display section 153SG029B, a third display section 153SG029C, and a fourth display section 153SG029D. Each of the first display portion 153SG029A to the fifth display portion 153SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 153SG029A to fifth display section 153SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed using the non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 153SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability/low-probability base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low-probability base state) for every 3rd out (low-probability/low-probability base state) in all game states. Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentages on display monitor 153SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. Further, when displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying these base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 is executed under the control of the main substrate 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. When it is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 153SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 153SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 153SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 153SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) includes a production control flag setting unit 153SG191, a production control timer setting unit 153SG192, a production control counter setting unit 153SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 153SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characterizing section 153SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure in the variable display. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative design variation stop process executed when ending.

Furthermore, in the start-winning reception command buffer 153SG194A in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display in the later-described pre-reading notice setting process (FIGS. 8-18) is secured for each storage area (entry).

The pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when the execution of the pending display announcement effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later. By doing so, the suspension memory display of the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first suspension memory display area 153SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 153SG005U, and when the execution of the suspension display notice effect is determined is "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star ( ☆)) or special mode (for example, blue or red camera) by setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display, is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. The possibility of a ready-to-win situation and the high possibility of execution of a setting suggestion performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 are announced.

The effect control CPU 120 stores a command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to start -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the variable display to start are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (153SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (153SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (153SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N), proceed to 153SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (153SGSa003; Y, 153SGSa004;Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (153SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; N), proceed to 153SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (153SGSa006). If the set value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), proceed to 153SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (153SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (153SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010). move on.

At 153SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). If the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 153SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened (153SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (153SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (153SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 153SGSa013d, RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (153SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, when the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the set value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is designated as a identifiable set value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, when the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 153SG029 can be ended.

If the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF at 153SGSa011 (153SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (153SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d without executing the processes of 153SGSa013a to 153SGSa013c.

At 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 153SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 153SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) without executing, go to 153SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes the process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153SGSa017 to 153SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the setting value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 again determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), proceed to 153SGSa022; (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 153SGSa028. (153SGSa016).

Also, at 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (153SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa019).

When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened, the lock switch 153SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (153SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the processes 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), and the open sensor 153SG090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (153SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029. (153SGSa024).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (153SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (153SGSa026; N), the processing of 153SGSa025 and 153SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 153SG029 stops blinking (153SGSa027) and proceeds to 153SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 are flashed over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1, only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be blinked. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 153SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, at 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (153SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (153SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, at 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (153SGSa031). Furthermore, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (153SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (153SGSa034; N), the processing of 153SGSa033 and 153SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 153SG029A, the second display 153SG029B, the third display 153SG029C, and the fourth display 153SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 153SG029, as notification (error notification) of the recovery from the power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. is displayed (153SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa032 (153SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 153SGSa032 to 153SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a store clerk, etc.), thereby displaying a display monitor 153SG029. , the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is recovered, the display monitor 153SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B notify the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON at 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined at 153SGSa014 that the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 8-15 is a flow chart showing the start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (153SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (153SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient to specify the number of first special figure reservation memory. 153SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (153SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting mouth buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (153SGS103 ).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 153SGS101 (153SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit at 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (153SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (153SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 153SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (153SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106 ).

After executing either of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data representing the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (153SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while when the start buffer value is "2" , Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in a second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the result of the variable display is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 153SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 153SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (153SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the process of 153SGS111, the winning random number determination process is executed (153SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (153SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (153SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 153SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by 153SGS 112 in FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number determination process. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 5) changes the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) to " It is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state as "big hit", whether to control to the small hit game state as the special figure display result as "small hit", and the like. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of 153SGS112. By, determination of whether or not to derive and display the big hit pattern as a special figure display result, determination of whether or not to derive and display the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, variable display mode of the decorative pattern determines whether or not is in a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pending display forewarning effect, as will be described later.

In the random number value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first checks the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit not shown, for example. The current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is specified (153SGS121). When the variable probability flag is on, the CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state, and when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, it specifies that it is in a time saving state, and both the probability changing flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, if the starting buffer value is 1, the CPU 103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7(A), and if the starting buffer value is 2, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in (B) may be set.

After that, referring to the jackpot numerical range (jackpot determination range) according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table, the special figure extracted at 153SGS109 in FIG. 8-15 It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for display result determination is within the jackpot determination range (153SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at 153SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that there is no jackpot at the time of variable display (153SGS123; N), it is further set to the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted in 153SGS109 of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is within the small hit determination range (153SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each judgment value It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the small hit determination range, the CPU 103 generates the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the small hit determination range It is sufficient if it can be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "small hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range at 153SGS124, that is, when it is determined that it does not become a small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; N), the variable display result is "miss". (153SGS125), and determines whether or not the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the current game state is the time-saving state (153SGS126). If the time saving flag is not set (153SGS126; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss (153SGS127), and if the time saving flag is set (153SGS126; Y), the variation pattern for loss The decision table D is selected and set (153SGSS128).

Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is one or less, as shown in FIG. 8-11(A). In addition, the variation pattern determination table D for loss is a variation pattern determination table for loss used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (D). be.

Incidentally, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, the deviation that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 A variation pattern determination table B for loss and a variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. Of the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to C, in the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for loss, a value from 0 to 450 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. In the fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C for loss, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of super reach within the range of possible random number values MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

For this reason, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in 153SGS132, which will be described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since it becomes a variation pattern of non-reach or super reach, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), when it is determined that it is within the jackpot determination range at 153SGS123, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot at the time of variable display (153SGS123; Y), jackpot type determination The type of jackpot is determined based on the random number MR2 for (153SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in 153SG130 is executed (153SG131), and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot variation patterns. set (153SG132).

In addition, when it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range at 153SGS124, that is, when it is determined that it will be a small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; Y), a symbol designation command according to the small hit type is transmitted. Execute the setting (153SG129).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132, the fluctuation pattern determination table set in the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132 and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern and is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (153SGS133). In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode, a variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" It is only necessary to provide a variation category and determine whether or not such a variation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 153SGS132 to the effect control board 12 (153SGS134), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 8-17 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (S76) in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, after the execution of the pre-reading notice setting processing (S161) shown in FIG. Any one of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 after executing the pending display update process for updating the display mode and the number of display of the pending storage display according to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) process is executed.

FIG. 8-18 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 8-17. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the pending display flag is not set, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry that has been set (153SGS243).

If there is an entry whose pending display flag value is already set to any one of 1 to 4, that is, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed, the entry (153SGS242 has the pending display flag "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is set to the pending display flag of the entry determined as not being executed (that is, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry with "○"). to end the pre-reading notice setting process (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, execution of a new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted.

In 153SGS243, if there is no entry set to any of the values 1 to 4 of the pending display flag, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 153SGS242 ) indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the pattern designation command of the entry indicates a big hit, the jackpot type is specified from the pattern designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 153SG193, for example. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to a jackpot time pending display notice effect determination table (not shown), whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the hold display. A display pattern in the case of executing the advance notice effect is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern (announcement type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 8-19(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of 153SGS245, the presence or absence of the pending display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (preview types) of the pending display pre-notice effect are provided: the display pattern α, the display pattern β, the display pattern γ, and the display pattern δ. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with a white star (☆). When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with the blue camera, and the pending display is performed. When the display pattern of the notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U with the red camera. Further, when non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (○) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55%. , the execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined, the execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%. is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and pending display notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10% Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, when the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category designation command of the entry (153SGS248), for example, the random number circuit 124 and effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the big hit type specified in 153SGS249, a small hit/losing hold display notice effect determination table (not shown) is referred to. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending display forewarning effect and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a loss or a small hit and the variation category is other (normal reach is a loss or a small hit), the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and 20%. Execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 5%, and a pending display notice in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the effect is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect with the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%. Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 8-19(A) and 8-19(B), in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display notice effect is executed, when the pending display notice effect is not executed In addition to being controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate, when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, than when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α The jackpot type is set to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation for being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation) is higher than the display pattern α and the display pattern β. is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability-variable degree of expectation for big win) for the type of big win to be big win B or big win C is the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is a loss and the variation category is super reach. In other words, the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (the blue and red camera modes) are suggested to be super reach variable displays capable of executing a setting suggestion effect, which will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), when the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach , the pending memory display is never displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 8-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect is determined after executing the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 (153SGS250). When execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, a value (one of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is set in the pending display flag of the entry and prefetched. The advance notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

FIG. 8-20 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the first to fourth first special symbol reserved storage corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), the illustrated Various command data and various flags (that is, variable display Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol reserved storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that three symbols are even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of aligned decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333", "555", "999", etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three patterns are aligned with "7" is determined as the stop pattern. do. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop pattern is a chance eye (3 ("334", "556", "778", etc.) are determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (153SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of super reach, proceed to 153SGS285, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach, suggesting effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect of the variable display. and which effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable rear display is executed (153SGS278). That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (big hit suggestive effect and setting suggestive effect) is the variation of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only in the display, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In addition, in the super reach variable display in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-28, the variable display result becomes a big hit as a suggestive effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a timer effect suggesting a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or that the result of the variable display will be a big hit, and suggesting a period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. , during the ready-to-win performance, which is the second half of the variable display, a jackpot suggesting performance suggesting that the result of the variable display will result in a big hit as a suggestive performance during the rear variable display, or a setting suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Suggestion production can be executed. In other words, the process of 153SGS278 is the process of determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and which of the big win suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (either the big hit suggestive effect or the set suggestive effect) is determined in the process of 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is determined in the processing of 153SGS278 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. A front part variable display suggestive effect determination process for determining which of the character effect and timer effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable display is executed (153SGS280). That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, the execution of the front variable display suggesting effect is not decided unless the execution of the rear variable display effect is decided. In variable display of reach and normal reach, no timer effect or character effect is executed as suggestive effect during front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect has been determined as the suggestive effect during front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is set to the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the variable rear display (as shown in FIG. 8-28 (A)). After 5 seconds from the start of the ready-to-reach effect), proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282), and if execution of the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is determined, wait for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display on the timer (as shown in FIG. 8-28 (B), the value according to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is 25 seconds 5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern TS-1 is the period, and 10 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2 that is the effect period of 30 seconds) ) and proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern in 153SGS285. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (153SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153SGS290).

FIG. 8-21 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display (153SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-20. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is set. If the display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SG301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22(A), when the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the pending display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the ratio determines non-execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, 10% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, and 0% of the ratio determines the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during variable display. Also, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If it is, the non-execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, and the performance of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "3", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 30 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, 35% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display, and 35% as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 0 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, 30% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display, and 70% determines the performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, it is more likely than when the pending display forecast effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined by a ratio, and the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case.

Also, attention is paid to the case where the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it was displayed as a camera, and the pending memory display is a blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the set suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in .

From the above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a square or star shape as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, While it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big hit suggestive effect is executed, the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is higher than in the case where it is displayed as a rear variable display, it is more important to play the game whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 153SGS302 (153SGS303). If it is determined in the process of 153SGS302 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process of determining the suggestive effect during the variable rear display is terminated. , 153SGS302, it is determined whether or not execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as a suggestive effect during rear variable display (153SGS304).

In the processing of 153SGS302, when the execution of the big hit suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect pattern of the big hit suggestive effect is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive effect determination process during the rear variable display is performed. End (153SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 8-22(B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 153SGS305. Of these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is: This is a production pattern (expectation for big win: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to the big win is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to the big win. This is a production pattern that suggests high (big hit expectation: high).

Then, in the processing of 153SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 8-23, when the variable display result is a big hit, the production control CPU 120 sets the production pattern of the big hit suggestion production at a rate of 10% to the pattern AS-1. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, in the process of 153SGS302, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and refers to the setting value specified command received from the CPU 103 (Pachinko game machine 1 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestive effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display (153SGS307).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-22(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 153SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the setting value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the setting value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set low and the setting values 5 and 6 are high, but the setting values 1 to 3 may be low and the setting values 4 to 6 may be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set to low, setting values 3 and 4 to intermediate settings, and setting values 5 and 6 to high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the processing of 153SGS307 described above, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern to pattern SS- at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 8-24. 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 25%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, and 6 The pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and 15 %, the pattern SS-3 is determined, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 5%.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the set value of 6 is determined.

FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during front variable display (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-20. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during rear variable display (153SGS312).

When the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined as the rear variable display suggestion performance, whether or not to execute the front variable display suggestion performance and the front variable display suggestion based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the result of the variable display The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 30%. Also, if the result of the variable display is a failure, 70% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 25% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Execution of the timer effect is determined at a rate of 5% as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part.

In other words, in the case where the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. Execution of suggestive performance is determined, and when the result of variable display is a big win, execution of character performance and execution of timer performance are determined at the same rate as suggestive performance during front variable display, while variable display result. In the case of a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestive performance during the front variable display. is set.

In addition, when execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect and the suggesting effect during the front variable display based on the result of the variable display. The effect to be executed as the presence/absence and suggestive effect during front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. determines the execution of the character performance as the suggestive performance during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer performance as the suggestive performance during the variable front display at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the result of the variable display is a failure, 80% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 0% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Execution of the timer effect is determined at a rate of 20% as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part.

In other words, when the execution of the set suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is being performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect is determined and the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined regardless of whether the result of the variable display is a big win or a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for a big win in the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so it is suggested during the front variable display. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-25, after executing 153SGS313 or 153SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (153SGS315). When it is decided not to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the process of deciding the suggestive effect during the variable front display is terminated, and when the execution of the suggestive effect during the variable front display is determined, the front is further processed. It is determined whether or not execution of a character presentation has been decided as a suggestive presentation during variable display (153SGS316).

When it is determined to execute a character presentation as a suggestive presentation during front variable display, the presentation pattern of the character presentation is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive presentation determination processing during variable front display is completed. (153 SGS317).

Incidentally, as the effect pattern of the character effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. . Among these production patterns, the pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) suggesting that the variable display result by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 has the lowest probability of a big win. Pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying a character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 (expectation for big win: medium ).

Therefore, in the processing of 153SGS317, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. , and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the pattern CS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the character effect at a rate of 80%, and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Further, when execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the suggestive effect determination process during variable display of the part is ended (153SGS318).

As the effect pattern of the timer effect that can be determined in the process of 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. 8-26(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Of these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the percentage of the variable display results that result in a big win on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of character effects (expectation for big win: high). ) together with the pattern TS-2 indicates the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, together with the image of the character X, for 25 seconds. is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character production (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the rear variable display suggestive production is started for 25 seconds with the image of the character Y. (See Figures 8-27(C), 8-29(D) and 8-29(E)).

Therefore, in the processing of 153SGS318, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 80% of the time, and pattern TS-2 20% of the time. In addition, when the suggestive effect during rear variable display whose execution has been determined is the set suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer In the case where the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the ratio of executing the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5 . Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the setting suggesting effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game interest.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed as a suggestion, and the suggestion production is set as a suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as a suggestion production during the front variable display. A production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-20 to 8-28, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during variable display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the effect process during variable display (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect during front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent effect process during variable display (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display by 1 each time the effect processing during the variable display is executed. Then, based on the value of the waiting timer for starting the suggestive performance during the rear variable display becoming 0, the process data corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined suggestive performance during the variable rear display is set. Then, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the effect process during variable display (S172).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 (A) and 8-28 (B), the jackpot suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display in the present characteristic portion 153SG are during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a longer period than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, even if the player takes his/her eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the big win suggesting effect or the setting suggesting effect.

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and 8-29 (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect. When the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ is determined, a new reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-29(C) to 8-29(E), when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display, which is the mode of the camera, is started as a new variable display, the front part A timer effect is started as a suggestive effect during variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. Renewal display of a timer for 25 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestive effect during variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. An update display of a timer for 30 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 8-30(F) to 8-30(H), when the variable display progresses together with the timer update display until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds (timer performance ends) during execution of the super ready-to-win performance, a big hit suggesting performance or setting suggesting performance is started as a suggesting performance during rear variable display.

Specifically, when execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (I) In the image display device 5, a message such as "chance!" indicating that the expectation of a big hit is low is displayed, and if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 8-30 (J). 8 is displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the effect pattern that has been determined is the pattern AS-3. As indicated by -30(K), a message indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of pattern AS-2, such as "Extremely Hot!", is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

On the other hand, when execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during rear variable display, as shown in FIGS. In the case of patterns SS-1 to SS-4, setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5, respectively, so that they are set in the pachinko machine 1. settings are suggested. Furthermore, when the effect pattern of the setting value suggesting effect is the pattern SS-5, the setting value suggesting image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4, is displayed on the image display device. 5.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice in the form of a blue or red camera, when the pre-reading notice is not executed or the reserved memory display The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or star. Therefore, the player anticipates that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance at the stage when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, and uses the mobile terminal such as a smartphone possessed by the player to suggest setting. It is now possible to make preparations for filming the production. In other words, the pending memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect prompting the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the character effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display indicating the degree of expectation for a big win. As shown in -26 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the suggested effect is set as the suggested effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is executed in a state where the player is paying attention, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as the suggestive effect during the front variable display during the variable display, in addition to the character effect, it is possible to execute a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggesting effect by the execution.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as the timer effect, a numerical value is displayed for the period until the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is started (see FIGS. 8-29 (D) and 8-29 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, by performing an increase/decrease display of a gauge, meter, etc., the rear variable display is suggested. The period until the start of execution of the effect may not be clearly notified (only an approximate period may be indicated).

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5 Any one of the displays in , or a combination of a plurality of aspects may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-30(H) and 8-31(L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is set to 0. Based on this, there is a case where a big hit suggesting effect is executed in addition to the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. In other words, even when the timer performance is executed, the big hit suggestion performance may be executed instead of the setting suggestion performance, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggesting effect and the big hit suggesting effect are performed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. Although only one of them can be executed as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. , both the setting suggesting performance and the big hit suggesting performance may be executed as the suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is always executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is not executed even if the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-27(B) and 8-27(C), as the effect patterns of the timer effect, a pattern TS-1 with a effect period of 25 seconds and a pattern with a effect period of 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-2, the setting suggesting performance is executed at a higher rate than when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggesting effect is executed over a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-28, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period, which is the latter half of the variable display of super reach, so that the setting suggestion effect by the player is executed. can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggesting effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half of the variable display of super reach, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half of the super reach variable display.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-18 and FIG. In the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the pending display notice effect that can be displayed in the mode or the like can be executed, and the display mode is a blue or red camera mode, It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or star. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the blue or red camera, the player can decide whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. Since the setting-suggestion performance is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting-suggestion performance.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 and 8-31, when the pending display advance notice effect is executed, it corresponds to the pending storage display which is the target of the pending display notice effect. The setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is ended). Therefore, since the setting suggesting effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display notice effect, the player is less likely to miss the setting suggesting effect. more can be prevented.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a form in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notice is a holding display notice An effect other than the effect may be made executable, and it may be suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the variable display immediately after the pending display previous notice effect is terminated) that is the target of the pending display previous notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the execution period of the pending display notice effect The setting suggestion effect may be executed from the previous timing).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pre-reading notice effect is changed to the white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. Since the display ratio is set lower than the display ratio, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, so that the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to attract the attention of the operator and further prevent the operator from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as the pre-reading notice effect in the form of a blue or red camera is set to the pre-reading notice effect in which the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display as a white square or star as a pre-reading advance notice effect, or the pending memory display as a blue or red camera color as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white square or star as the pre-reading advance notice effect may be the same.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smart phone before starting the setting suggesting effect, the success rate of photographing the setting suggesting effect by the player can be increased.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggesting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect, the speaker 8L, 8R Alternatively, the player may be separately prompted to prepare for photographing the setting suggesting effect by outputting a sound or displaying a message image on the image display device 5 .

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the display pattern γ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a red camera are used to perform the pending display forewarning effect. It can be executed, and as shown in FIG. The ratio of execution of the setting suggestion effect is different between the case of display in the camera mode (the value of the pending display flag is 4). In particular, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera, setting suggestion effects are executed at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. When the display is displayed in the form of a red camera, the player is more focused on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than in the case where the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, the pending memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display starts. Although the form in which the form does not change has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display form of the pending memory display changes from the blue camera form to the red camera form. Further, a case is provided in which the pending memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display changes from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. may By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed until the variable display is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestive effect is only in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with the long special figure variation time. It is executable, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, so the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period is suppressed, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion production is set to 7 seconds longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so the super reach variable It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during the display (during execution of the ready-to-win effect).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since the variable display is suggested, the reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby making the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can be improved.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-19, if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach, the pending display Since the pending memory display is not displayed in the blue or red camera mode as the advance notice effect, the player's attention is not focused on the pending memory display being displayed in the blue or red camera mode. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting effect from being executed and the interest to be lowered due to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display being the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-20 to 8-28, during the variable display of super reach, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display including the timer effect, but it is more special than the variable display of super reach. Since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach with a short fluctuation time, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is not executed Timer effect during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency in the performance due to the execution of

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed, and the suggestion production is set as the suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. is set to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the variable front part It may be set so that the set suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggesting effect during display.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square, a star, or a blue 8-33 (A) and As shown in FIG. 8-33(B), when the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D. When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, at least the reserved memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera is displayed preferentially over the effect image 153SG005E (the blue or red camera The reserved memory display in the form of (1) may be displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera due to the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera being blocked by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 8-34(A) and 8-34(B), as a modified example 153SG-3, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect for 7 seconds during variable display of normal reach and non-shortening non-reach. good too. Furthermore, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, a period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34 (C), it is a special variable time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach 3.75 seconds to 3 seconds (shorter than 5.75 seconds)) may be executed setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 153SG-4, the pending memory display is a blue camera mode The decision ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggesting effect may be different between the case of displaying in the case of displaying in the form of the red camera and the case of displaying in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera the suspension storage display is displayed as the suspension display advance notice performance, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of variable display) are provided as the start timing of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of super reach. Although the setting suggestive effect is more likely to be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effect by executing the rear variable display suggestive effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As 5, when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 25 seconds after the variable display start. SS-3 to pattern SS-5, etc., may be performed with effect patterns suggesting high set values. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that is executed as a suggestive effect during the front variable display and the effect that is displayed as a pending display notice effect It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by only one of the display mode of the pending memory display. Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the set suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display in which the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is executed. , The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a big hit, a setting suggestion effect is performed during the big win game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, the execution of the new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed, only the execution of the new pending display foretelling effect in a part of the display patterns may be restricted. For example, when the pending display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new pending display notice effect is executed. It restricts only what is executed in the display pattern α and the display pattern β (that the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of pending display forewarning effects with different suggested contents. Further, when the pending display forewarning effect is already executed by the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the execution of the new pending display forewarning effect by the display pattern α or the display pattern β is restricted. , the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. Also, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (when the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star), a new pending display notice effect By limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (that the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. It is possible to make the player pay more attention.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the pending display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect Alternatively, an effect other than the pending display notice effect may be executable if the effect is executable from the timing before the target variable display is started.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above embodiment, a form in which the character effect and the timer effect can be executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, any effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the result of the variable display will be a big hit.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 092IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 092IW will be described. In this characterizing part 092IW, a big win suggesting performance suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display will be a big hit, and a preparation performance notifying that the big win suggesting performance will be executed before the big win suggesting performance is executed. It is possible. In addition, the jackpot suggestion effect that is predicted to be executed by the preparation effect is the prediction effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (the variable display that is pending execution), and the jackpot reliability in the variable display that is being executed. It may be either a foretelling effect that forewarns the degree. In this characterizing section 092IW, as the jackpot suggesting effects, it is possible to execute a pending display forewarning effect, a timer effect, and a chance eye forewarning effect. In addition, as a preparatory effect for notifying that the big hit suggesting effect will be executed before the big hit suggesting effect is executed, a pending display for notifying that the pending display notifying effect will be executed before the pending display notifying effect is executed. A notice preparation effect and a timer preparation effect for notifying that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed can be executed.

FIG. 9-1 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (step S76) in this characterizing part 092IW. In the effect control process processing in this characteristic part 092IW, the pre-reading notice effect is executed after execution of the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) in which determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed for executing the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. A pre-reading notice execution process (step 092IWS162) for execution is executed, and then one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 is executed.

FIG. 9-2 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 9-1.

In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command for one set of starting winnings has been received (step 092IWS001). Specifically, it is checked whether or not a set of start winning designation command, pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and pending memory number notification command are newly stored in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning. In this example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the command at the time of starting winning is received, the received command at the time of starting winning is stored in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning provided in RAM122. In this example, since the upper limits of the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories are 4, the reception command buffer at the time of start winning has four stores corresponding to the first reserved memories and the second reserved memories. area is provided. If a new command for one set of starting winnings has not been received, the process is terminated as it is.

When one set of starting winning command is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed (step 092IWS001). If the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the process is terminated as it is (that is, no new pre-reading notice effect is executed).

If the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of pending memories is 2 or more (step 092IWS002). If the number of pending memories is not 2 or more, the process is terminated as it is (that is, no new pre-reading announcement effect is executed). It should be noted that whether or not the number of pending memories is 2 or more can be determined by, for example, confirming a pending memory number notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the number of pending memories is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect and the effect mode in the case of executing (step 092IWS003).

The pending display notice performance is a performance suggesting that the display result of the corresponding variable display will be a big win by changing the display mode of the pending memory display (and the active display) to a display mode different from the normal mode. In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a pattern of changing the display mode at the time of being displayed as the pending memory display is shown as the pending display notice effect, but it is not limited to such a configuration, and is displayed as the pending memory display. It may include a pattern that is displayed in a normal mode when it is active and changes the display mode when it is displayed as an active display. That is, it may be possible to execute the pending display announcement effect that changes the display mode of the pending memory display or the active display at an arbitrary timing from the start winning point to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, the suspension display advance notice preparation effect for notifying that the suspension display notice effect will be executed may be configured to be executable at an arbitrary timing from the start winning point to the end of the target variable display. Also, the display mode of the pending memory display or the active display may be configured to change multiple times. In the case of such a configuration, it may be possible to execute the suspension display announcement preparation effect corresponding to each suspension display announcement effect.

FIG. 9-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display notice effect determination table. At step 092 IWS003, a random number for determination of effect is extracted, and the pending display notice effect determination table is referred to. Based on whether it corresponds to "super reach loss", "jackpot other than jackpot A", or "jackpot A", regarding the pending display notice effect, "no execution, pending memory display: normal mode (white)", "execution Select one of the following: Yes Reserved memory display: 1st effect mode (blue), Executed Reserved memory display: 2nd effect mode (green), and Executed Reserved memory display: 3rd effect mode (red) do.

In the pending display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-3(A), a determination value corresponding to a random number for effect determination is assigned for each prize determination result. Percentages of judgment values obtained are shown. In other words, for each winning judgment result, the pending display notice effect is "without execution pending memory display: normal mode (white)", "executed pending memory display: first effect mode (blue)", "executed pending memory Display: 2nd effect mode (green)" and "execution pending memory display: 3rd effect mode (red)" are determined. In this example, in addition to the pending display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), the pending display notice preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-3 (B) and the FIG. 9-4 (A) Regarding the timer effect determination table, the timer preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-4(B), and the chance eye preview effect determination table shown in FIG. The ratio of whether it is determined to

Features of the pending display notice effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-3(A), in the pending display notice effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "jackpot", compared to the case of "loss", the pending display notice effect "no execution" The determination value is assigned so that the rate of determination of "executed" is higher than that of ". In addition, in the pending display notice effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", compared to the case of "loss", "executed pending memory display: first effect mode (blue)" is more " ``Executed, reserved memory display: 2nd production mode (green)'' and ``with execution, reserved memory display: 2nd production mode (green)'' are decided to be ``with execution, reserved memory display: 3rd production mode (red)''. Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of With such a configuration, when the pending display notice effect is executed, the second effect mode (green) is preferred to the first effect mode (blue), and the third effect mode (red) is preferred to the second effect mode (green). , it will be suggested that it will be a jackpot That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of third rendering mode (red)>second rendering mode (green)>first rendering mode (blue)>no execution.

If it is determined not to execute the pending display notice effect in step S092IWS003 (N of step S092IWS004), the process proceeds to step S092IWS008, and if it is determined to be executed (Y of step S092IWS004), the effect control CPU 120 suspends A pending display notice effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the display notice effect is set (step S092IWS005).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the pending display notice preparation effect (step S092IWS006). The pending display advance notice preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and foretells that the pending display advance notice effect will be executed before the pending display advance notice effect is executed.

FIG. 9-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table. In step 092 IWS006, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, and the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table is referred to. It is determined to be either “with execution, first effect mode (small effect)” or “with execution, second effect mode (large effect)”.

Features of the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table, the higher the expectation of the effect mode of the pending display advance notice effect of the big hit, the more the holding display advance notice preparation effect is “executed”. Judgment values are assigned so that the rate of determination of "with execution" is higher than that of "without execution". In addition, in the pending display notice preparation effect determination table, the higher the expectation of the effect mode of the pending display notice effect of the big hit, the higher the “executed first effect mode (small effect)”. The determination values are assigned so that the ratio of determination to "2 effect mode (large effect)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big win is achieved when the holding display advance notice preparation performance is executed, and furthermore, when it is executed in the second performance mode (large effect) rather than the first performance mode (small effect). will be In other words, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second presentation mode (large effect)>first presentation mode (small effect)>no execution.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the reserved storage number is 3 or more (step 092IWS007). If the reserved storage number is not equal to or greater than 3, the process ends. It should be noted that whether or not the number of reserved memories is 3 or more can be determined, for example, by confirming the number of reserved memories notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the number of pending memories is 3 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 092IWS008).

The timer effect suggests a period from the start timing of the target variable display to the start of execution of a specific effect (for example, a suggestive effect during the rear variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG), as well as suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit. It is a performance.

In this characterizing portion 092IW, the timer effect is executed during the target variable display. It is realized by setting a production control pattern and executing various production controls based on the production control pattern in the production process during variable display (S172).

In addition, not limited to the configuration of this characteristic part 092IW, for example, whether or not to execute the timer preparation effect described later without determining whether to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, and the effect mode in the case of executing it are determined. It may be determined whether or not to execute the timer effect when the target variable display is started. Further, in this case, whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode in the case of execution may be determined at different ratios according to whether or not the timer preparation effect is to be executed and the effect mode.

Further, for example, the timer effect may be started during the variable display that is executed before the target variable display, or at the timing after a predetermined period has passed since the target variable display is started. You may start. That is, the timer effect may be started at an arbitrary timing from the timing of starting winning to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, for the timer preparation effect that foretells that the timer effect will be executed, any timing from the timing of the start winning to the end of the target variable display (however, until the timing when the execution period of the timer effect can be secured) You may start with

FIG. 9-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table. In step 092 IWS008, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, the timer effect determination table is referred to, and the newly received commands (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of starting winning are "non-super reach", "super Based on whether it corresponds to either "reach failure" or "super reach jackpot", the timer effect is set to "no execution", "execution first effect mode (25 seconds)" and "execution second effect mode (30 seconds)". second)”.

Features of the timer effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), in the timer effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big win", compared to the case of "loss", the timer effect is more "not executed" than "no execution". Judgment values are assigned so as to increase the percentage of judgments of "executed". In addition, in the timer effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", compared to the case of "losing", the "second effect with execution mode (25 seconds)" is higher than the "first effect mode with execution (25 seconds)". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage determined in "mode (30 seconds)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big win is achieved when the timer performance is executed and further when the second performance mode (30 seconds) is executed rather than the first performance mode (25 seconds). Become. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second presentation mode (30 seconds)>first presentation mode (25 seconds)>no execution.

If it is determined not to execute the timer effect in step 092IWS008 (N of step S092IWS009), the process proceeds to step S092IWS012, and if it is determined to be executed (Y of step S092IWS009), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect. A timer effect flag indicating that it has been decided to execute is set (step S092IWS010).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the timer preparation effect (step S092IWS011). The timer preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and foretells that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed.

FIG. 9-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer preparation effect determination table. In step 092IWS006, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, the timer preparation effect determination table is referred to, and based on the effect mode of the timer effect, the timer preparation effect is set to "no execution", "executed first effect mode ( (small effect)" or "executed, second rendering mode (large effect)".

Features of the timer preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-4(B), in the timer preparation effect determination table, as the effect mode of the timer effect has a higher expectation for a big hit, the timer preparation effect is more likely to be "executed" than "no execution". Judgment values are assigned so as to increase the percentage of cases where it is determined that there is a presence. Further, in the timer preparation effect determination table, as the effect mode of the timer effect has a higher expectation for a big hit, the "second effect mode with execution (character A)" is more likely than the "first effect mode with execution (character A)". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage determined to be "Character B)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big hit is achieved when the timer preparation performance is executed and further when the second performance mode (character B) is executed rather than the first performance mode (character A). become. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of second effect mode (character B)>first effect mode (character A)>no execution.

This characterizing portion 092IW is configured such that the effect mode of the executable jackpot suggestive effect is different depending on which effect mode of the preparation effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-3(B), when the suspension display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the suspension display is performed in one of the first to third effect modes. When the advance notice effect is executed and the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed, the pending display advance notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), when the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed in one of the first to second effect modes. When the timer effect of the second effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed by the second effect mode. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied depending on the production mode of the preparation production, and each production form of the preparation production (that is, each expectation level) is executed in combination with other preparation production and big hit suggestion production. It is possible to suitably adjust the degree of expectation at the time.

Also, in this characterizing portion 092IW, the big hit suggestion effect is configured to be executable without executing the corresponding preparation effect. Specifically, when it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect or a timer effect, it may be determined that the pending display notice preparation effect or timer preparation effect is not to be executed (Fig. 9-3 (B), Fig. 9- 4(B)). And it is configured such that the easiness of execution differs depending on whether or not an uncorresponding preparation effect has been executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the result of determination at the time of winning is a big hit, it is likely to be decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4, it is likely to be decided to execute the timer effect. However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect. Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect not corresponding to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is not executed. With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In this characteristic part 092IW, when the preparatory performance is executed, the corresponding big hit suggestive performance is always executed. A normal preparation effect to be executed and a fake preparation effect to which the corresponding jackpot suggesting effect is not executed after the effect may be executable. In this case, when the fake suspension display advance notice preparation effect is executed, compared to when the fake suspension display advance notice preparation effect is not executed, the timer effect (may or may not be accompanied by the timer preparation effect) may not exist) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is false, and it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in this characteristic portion 092IW, the proportion of which performance mode of the jackpot suggestive effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed. Specifically, when the performance mode of the pending display notice effect and the timer preparation effect is determined to be the second effect mode, compared with the case where the first effect mode is determined, the pending display notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect are performed. The percentage of decisions to execute is high (see FIGS. 9-3(B) and 9-4(B)). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance eye announcement effect (step 092IWS012).

The chance eye notice effect is obtained by deriving and displaying a chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decoration symbols "123") as a display result of the variable display executed before the target variable display. This is an effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display (or any of the variable displays that are not specified and that are held and stored) will be a big hit.

FIG. 9-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance's advance notice effect determination table. At step 092 IWS012, a random number for determination of effect is extracted, and the chance eye notice effect determination table is referred to, and the newly received command (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of start winning is "non-super reach", Either ``no execution'' or ``with execution'' is determined for the chance notice performance based on which one of ``loss of super reach'', ``jackpot other than jackpot A'', and ``jackpot A'' corresponds.

The feature of the chance eye announcement effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-5(A), in the chance prediction effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", compared to the case of "loss", the chance prediction effect is "not executed". The determination value is assigned so that the rate of determination of "executed" is higher than that of ". With such a configuration, it is suggested that there will be a big hit when the chance's foretelling effect is executed.

This feature part 092IW is configured to be able to execute a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, and a chance eye notice effect as the jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in 9-5(A), the chance notice effect is executed when the result of winning judgment is a big hit at a lower rate than the pending display notice effect and the timer effect, and is executed when the result is a loss. Therefore, there is little difference in the execution ratio between when the winning judgment result is a big hit and when it is not. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower in the chance-eye forewarning effect than in the pending display forewarning effect and the timer effect.

When it is decided not to execute the chance eye notice effect in step S092IWS012 (N of step S092IWS013), the process proceeds to step S092IWS015, and when it is decided to execute (Y of step S092IWS013), the effect control CPU 120 A chance eye notice effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the eye notice effect is set (step S092IWS014).

Next, when the pending display notice effect flag is set (Y in step S092IWS015), the effect control CPU 120 displays a new pending storage display according to the determination of the pending display notice preparation effect (step S092IWS016). .

In step S092IWS016, for example, when it is determined to execute the suspension display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a new suspension memory display in the normal mode, and also displays the suspension memory display. A small effect image (see, for example, the small effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 9-11 (B1)) is displayed near the . Further, when it is decided to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode, in the image display device 5, a new pending memory display is displayed in the normal mode, and an effect is displayed in the vicinity of the pending memory display. A large image (see, for example, the large effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 9-11 (A1)) is displayed.

Next, when the timer effect flag is not set (N of step S092IWS017), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is, and when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step S092IWS017), It is checked whether or not the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (step S092IWS018). Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (Y in step S092IWS018), effect control CPU 120 executes a timer preparation effect (step S092IWS019). After that, the process ends.

In step S092IWS019 (and step S092IWS022 to be described later), for example, when it is determined that the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode is to be executed, the image display device 5 displays the character A for notifying that the timer effect will be executed. An image (see, for example, image 092IW005 of character A in FIG. 9-10(E)) is displayed. Further, when it is decided to execute the timer preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a character B image for notifying that the timer effect will be executed.

When the suspension display notice effect flag is not set in step S092IWS015 (N in step S092IWS015), effect control CPU 120 displays a new suspension storage display in a normal mode (step S092IWS020).

Next, when the timer effect flag is not set (N of step S092IWS021), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is, and when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step S092IWS021), A timer preparation effect is executed (step S092IWS022). After that, the process ends.

FIG. 9-6 is a flow chart showing a pre-reading notice execution process (step 092IWS161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 9-1.

In the pre-reading notice execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the pending display notice effect flag is set (step 092IWS102) when it is time to shift the reserved storage (Y in step 092IWS101). .

When the pending display notice effect flag is set (Y in step 092IWS102), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pending display notice preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS103).

When the pending display notice preparation effect is being executed (Y in step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 ends the pending display notice preparation effect and executes the pending display notice preparation effect (step 092IWS104).

Next, when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step 092IWS105), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the timer preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS106).

When the timer preparation effect is not being executed (N of step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer preparation effect (step 092IWS107).

Next, execution timings of the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect, and the timer effect and the timer preparation effect will be described. FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution timing of the pending display notice effect (preparation effect) and the timer effect (preparation effect).

FIG. 9-7(A) shows an example of the case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the suspension display notice preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 9-2), and is suspended at the shift timing of the suspension storage. After the display announcement preparation effect is completed, the pending display announcement effect is executed (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading announcement execution process shown in FIG. 9-6).

FIG. 9-7(B) shows an example of the case where it is decided to execute the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the timer preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS021 to 092IWS022 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 9-2), and at the start timing of the target variable display. The timer preparation effect ends and the timer effect is started (for example, the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set in the variable display start setting process (S171), and the output control pattern is set in the variable display effect process (S172). realized by executing various production controls based on patterns).

FIG. 9-7(C) shows an example of the case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. . In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 9-2). , the timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS018 to 092IWS019 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 9-2). Then, at the shift timing of the pending memory, the pending display notice preparation effect is finished and the pending display notice effect is executed (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading notice execution processing shown in FIG. 9-6). After that, the timer preparation effect ends at the start timing of the target variable display, and the timer effect starts (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set, It is realized by executing various effects control based on the output control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172).

FIG. 9-7(D) shows an example of the case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. . In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 9-2). , the timer preparation effect is not started (for example, it corresponds to the process of step 092IWS018 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 9-2). Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect is completed at the shift timing of the pending memory and the pending display notice preparation effect is executed (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading notice execution processing shown in FIG. 9-6). , a timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS105 to 092IWS107 of the pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 9-6). After that, the timer preparation effect ends at the start timing of the target variable display, and the timer effect starts (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set, It is realized by executing various effects control based on the output control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172).

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect. FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the effects of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of the case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning, and FIG. -7(D) corresponds to the example.

As shown in FIGS. 9-8 (A) and (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, the suspension display notice effect and the suspension display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) When the execution of the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is determined, a new suspended memory display is displayed in the normal mode in the first suspended memory display area 092IW001 and the second suspended memory display area 092IW002. be. At this time, the suspension display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is started, and a lightning bolt-shaped image 092IW004a with a large effect is displayed in the vicinity of the new suspension memory display. Note that the timer advance notice preparation effect is restricted from being executed simultaneously with the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode), so it is not executed at this timing.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-8(C) to 9-8(D), when the variable display is completed and the pending storage is shifted and a new variable display is started, the pending display notification preparation is performed. The rendering (second rendering mode) ends expansively (for example, display control is performed such that the lightning bolt-shaped large-effect image 092IW004a acts on the reserved memory display and disappears), and the display mode of the reserved memory display changes to red. A holding display forewarning effect (third effect mode) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8(E), a timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is started, and an image 092IW005 of character A for notifying that the timer effect will be executed is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 9-8(F) to 9-8(G), when a new variable display targeted for the timer effect is started, the timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is expansive. , and a timer effect (first effect mode) is started in which the timer is updated and displayed for 25 seconds, which is the period until the specific effect during the variable display.

This characterizing portion 092IW is configured to be able to execute a pending display notice effect and a timer effect as a jackpot suggesting effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display will result in a big win. In addition, a holding display notice preparation effect for notifying that the holding display notice effect will be executed before the holding display notice effect is executed, and a timer for notifying that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed. It is configured to be able to execute the preparation performance as the preparation performance.

Such a preparatory performance has a function of drawing attention to the big-win suggestive performance executed after the preparatory performance, but if a plurality of preparatory performances are simultaneously executed, the player's expectations are too high, resulting in a big win. If not, there is a risk that interest will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 092IW, simultaneous execution of a plurality of preparation effects is restricted. Specifically, the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are executed in different periods, and are configured not to be executed at the same time (in this example, the pending display notice preparation effect ( After the execution of the second effect mode) is completed, the timer preparation effect is executed (see FIG. 9-7(D)). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration of this characteristic portion 092IW, the execution period of the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are configured so as not to overlap at all. The execution period may be made different by making one of the end timing different.

In addition, in the configuration of this characteristic part 092IW, the pending display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) having a lower expectation level than the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) can be executed at the same time as the timer preparation effect. However, it is not limited to such a configuration, and the reservation display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is not as much as the reservation display notice preparation effect (second effect mode), but the timer preparation is performed at a predetermined ratio. It may not be executed at the same time as the presentation. Also, a plurality of preparation effects may not always be executed at the same time.

Further, for example, the effect mode of the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode with lower expectations than the second effect mode, and the effect mode of the timer preparation effect is the first effect mode with lower expectations than the second effect mode. It may be executed at the same time only in the case of the presentation mode.

Further, for example, when a plurality of preparation performances are executed simultaneously (or when a plurality of preparation performances are simultaneously executed in a second performance mode with a high degree of expectation), a big win may be determined. .

In addition, in the configuration of this characteristic portion 092IW, a pattern in which the display mode of the pending memory display changes once is shown, but a pattern in which the display mode of the pending memory display (and the active display) changes multiple times is provided. When the reserved memory display (or active display) is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode (specifically, a display mode in which there is a display mode with a higher degree of expectation), the retained memory An effect that suggests that the display mode of the display (or active display) will change (for example, if an arrow flies toward the reserved memory display (or active display) and pierces the reserved memory display (or active display), the change will occur. , the effect that does not change unless it is stabbed (may be a dedicated effect that is executed only when the display mode of the reserved memory (or active display) is in a display mode other than the normal mode), etc.) may be executed more frequently. , may be prevented from being executed.

Next, a description will be given of the processing for executing the chance prediction effect. FIG. 9-9 is a flow chart showing an example of the chance prediction setting process. The chance eye advance notice setting process is executed as part of the variable display start setting process (step S171) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 9-1.

In the chance prediction setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the chance prediction effect flag is set (step 092IWS201). If the chance prediction effect flag is set, the decision table is used to determine whether or not the chance prediction effect is to be executed (step 092, IWS 202).

FIGS. 9-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a chance prediction execution propriety determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-10, when neither the pending display notice preparation effect nor the timer preparation effect is being executed, the percentage of "executable" (that is, execution of the chance eye notice effect) is 100%. allow). In addition, when either the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode, it is "executable" at a rate of 20% (that is, the execution of the chance notice effect is permitted). ), and 80% of the time, it is determined that "execution is not permitted" (that is, execution of the chance prediction effect is not permitted). Also, in the case where either the pending display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is being executed in the first effect mode (and neither of them is being executed in the second effect mode), the ratio is 100%. , it is determined that "execution is not allowed" (that is, the execution of the chance notice effect is not permitted).

If execution of the chance eye announcement effect is permitted in step 092IWS202 (Y in step 092IWS203), the chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decorative symbols "123") is determined as the decorative symbol stop symbol (step 092IWS203). 092IWS204). It should be noted that when the stop design of the decorative design has already been determined before step 092IWS204, the stop design of the decorative design is changed to the chance eye design.

Next, a description will be given of the presentation mode of the pending display notice preparation effect and the chance eye notice effect. FIGS. 9-11 are explanatory diagrams showing the effects of the pending display notice preparation effect and the opportunity notice effect.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A1) and (A2), the suspension display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is executed, and a lightning bolt-shaped image 092IW004a with a large effect is displayed near the suspension memory display. Occasionally, there is a case where the execution of the chance prediction effect is permitted, and when the execution is permitted, the chance symbol (a combination of decorative symbols "123" in this example) is used as the decorative symbol stop symbol. Is displayed. That is, the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are executed simultaneously.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (B1) and (B2), the suspension display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is executed, and an image 092IW004b of small and large lightning bolt type effects is displayed near the suspension memory display. Since execution of the chance's foretelling performance is not permitted when the game is on, a stop pattern of a decorative pattern different from the chance's pattern (combination of decorative patterns of "123" in this example) is displayed. That is, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are not executed at the same time.

In this characteristic part 092IW, it is possible to execute a chance notice effect separately from the pending display notice effect and the timer effect as the jackpot suggestion effect, and this chance notice effect is a preparation effect such as a pending display notice preparation effect and a timer preparation effect. (that is, it is executed in a period before execution of the target variable display, see FIGS. 9-11 (A1) and (A2)). In addition, as described above, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower in the chance eye notice effect than in the pending display notice effect and the timer effect. Therefore, when the preparatory performance is being executed (that is, before the big hit suggesting performance is executed and the degree of expectation is unknown), the chance prediction performance with low expectation of the big win is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the production effect of the preparation production is lowered. Moreover, there is a possibility that the suggested degree of expectation may become difficult to understand. Therefore, the present characteristic part 092IW is configured so that the second chance notice effect is more likely to be executed when the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is not executed than when it is executed ( For example, see FIGS. 9-10). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, when the preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed and when the preparation effect of the second effect mode with a higher degree of expectation than the first effect mode is executed, the chance notice is given. It is configured such that the easiness of execution of the production is different. Specifically, the second chance notice effect is more pronounced when the pending display notice preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect) than when it is executed in the first effect mode (small effect). It is configured so that execution is easily permitted (see FIGS. 9-10). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest while securing an opportunity to execute the chance prediction effect.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is provided. Executable suggestive effect execution means, and preparation effect execution capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, pending display advance notice preparation effect, timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. means, the suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect) and a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, and the preparation effect includes a second A first preparation effect (for example, pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that one suggestion effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (for example, timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed. , the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect can be executed at the same time, and the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are restricted from being executed at the same time (for example, the pending display advance notice preparation The effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are not executed at the same time (see FIG. 9-7(D)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) can be executed. Execution means, and preparation effect execution means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display announcement preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestion effect will be executed before the suggestion effect is executed, The suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect), a second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggestive effect, and the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect. includes a different third suggesting effect (for example, a chance-th announcement effect), and the preparation effect includes a first preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggesting effect will be executed, and a second Including a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed, and the third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed in parallel during the same period. It is possible (see FIGS. 9-11 (A1) and (A2)), and when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed, either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect The third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 9-10). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) can be executed. An execution means and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, The suggestive effects include a plurality of types of first suggestive effects with different expectations (for example, pending display announcement effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggested effects. and the first suggesting effect includes a predetermined first suggesting effect and a special first suggesting effect with a higher degree of expectation than the predetermined first suggesting effect (for example, a first effect mode (blue) suspended display (including the notice effect and the pending display notice effect of the third effect mode (red)), and the preparation effect is the first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed (for example, the reserve display notice preparation effect). and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed, and the first preparation effect includes a first effect mode and the first effect as a effect mode. There is a second effect mode in which the special first suggestion effect is more likely to be executed than the mode (for example, there are a first effect mode (small effect) and a second effect mode (large effect), and a second effect mode (large effect). ) is executed, the holding display forewarning effect of the first effect mode (blue) is not executed, and the holding display forewarning effect of the third effect mode (red) is likely to be executed. 3 (B)), the execution ratio of the second preparation effect is different between when the first preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed and when the first preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed ( For example, the timer preparation effect is executed at the same time when the pending display notice preparation effect of the first effect mode (small effect) is being executed, but the pending display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode (large effect) is executed. are not executed at the same time (see Figure 9-7). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) can be executed. An execution means and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, The suggestive effects include a plurality of types of first suggestive effects with different expectations (for example, pending display announcement effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggested effects. and a third suggesting effect (for example, a chance forewarning effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect, and the first suggesting effect includes a predetermined first suggesting effect and the predetermined first suggesting effect. Including a special first suggestive effect with a higher expectation than the effect (for example, including a first effect mode (blue) pending display notice effect and a third effect mode (red) pending display notice effect), preparation The effects include a first preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggesting effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggesting effect will be executed (for example, a timer The third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect, and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 9-11 (A1) and (A2)). 1 preparation effect has a first effect mode and a second effect mode in which a special first suggestive effect is more likely to be executed than the first effect mode (for example, a first effect mode (small effect)). There is a second production mode (large effect), and when the pending display notice preparation production of the second production mode (large effect) is executed, the holding display notice preparation production of the first production mode (blue) is not executed, It is easy to execute the pending display notice effect of the 3 production modes (red) (see FIG. 9-3 (B)), when the first preparation production of the first production mode is executed, and when the first preparation production of the second production mode is executed The execution ratio of the third suggestive effect differs depending on when the effect is executed (for example, when the second chance preview effect is executed, the pending display preview preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect). Execution is more likely to be permitted than when it is executed in the first rendering mode (small effect) (see FIGS. 9-10). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the period during which the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed are different (for example, after the execution of the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is is executed (see FIG. 9-7(D)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the first suggestive effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes (eg, first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), third effect mode (red), etc.). 3 (A)), and the first preparation effect has a plurality of types of effect modes (eg, first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (large effect), etc.). -3 (B)), and depending on which production mode the first preparation production is executed, the production mode of the first suggestive production that can be executed differs (for example, the first When the holding display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the holding display notice preparation effect is executed in one of the first to third effect modes, and the holding display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed. If it is done, the pending display notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, the suggestion effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect It may be determined that the timer preparation effect is not executed (see FIGS. 9-3 (B) and 9-4 (B))), depending on whether or not an uncorresponding preparation effect has been executed, the ease of execution Different (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the winning determination result is a big hit, it is likely to be decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 In addition, it is easy to determine if the timer effect is also executed.However, it may be determined that the timer preparation effect is not executed.Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect that does not correspond to the timer effect is executed, the pending display The timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the advance notice preparation effect is not executed). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the ratio of which suggestive effect of the effect mode is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed (for example, the effect mode of the pending display notice effect and the timer preparation effect). is determined to be the second effect mode, compared with the case of being determined to be the first effect mode, the ratio of deciding to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is high. See Figure 9-4 (B)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 092IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by other characterizing portions such as the characterizing portion 153SG to form a gaming machine. For example, the timer preparation effect indicated by the characteristic part 092IW indicates that a timer effect suggesting a period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, as well as suggesting that the jackpot indicated by the feature part 153SG will be executed. The timer performance can execute a big hit suggesting performance suggesting a big win as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display during the ready-to-win performance or a setting suggesting performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加You may make it become.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, suggesting that it is controlled to the advantageous state. Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, pending display notice effect, timer effect, chance notice effect, etc.) and preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed (For example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) is provided, and the suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect) and the first suggesting effect. includes a different second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) and a third suggesting effect (for example, a chance notice effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect, and the preparation effect is the first A first preparation effect (for example, pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (for example, timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed. , the third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 9-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the first preparation effect and the second The third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when one of the two preparation effects is being executed (for example, FIG. 9- 10), detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) capable of detecting actions of the player, and specific display means (for example, active display area 87AKA1) capable of displaying specific display corresponding to the variable display. , first reservation display area 87AKB1, second reservation display area 87AKB2, etc.), and promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect that promotes the action of the player (for example, effect control for executing step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display CPU 120 for use, etc.), action effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS053 of effect processing during variable display, etc.) capable of executing action effect based on the detection result of the detection means, and execution of variable display A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS049 of effect processing during variable display) is provided, and the specific display means uses a specific mode (for example, display image 87AKC4). Multiple display modes (e.g., display screen display colors corresponding to the images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, etc.), and the promotion effect execution means includes a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, etc.). The promotion effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3), and the predetermined effect execution means can perform the predetermined mode (for example, the display image 87AKE3 Used "Intense heat! ! , etc.) (for example, messages corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3). , the predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined mode (see, for example, the cut-in effect decision example 87AK41 in FIGS. 11-12), and the promotion effect is performed in the special mode at a different rate according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect. is executed (for example, refer to the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect corresponding to the cut-in effect in FIGS. 11 to 13), and is controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (for example, FIG. 11- Determination example 87AK51 of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in 13) game machine is mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest. In addition, the player's sense of expectation can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Regarding the promotion effect, the action effect, and the predetermined effect, neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed compared to the time when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed. It may be easier to execute when. In addition, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are more likely to be executed when the promotion effect, the action effect, or the predetermined effect is not executed than when the promotion effect, the action effect, or the predetermined effect is executed. You may do so. Alternatively, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect may not be executed while the promotion effect, the motion effect, or the predetermined effect is being executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the execution of other effects during the execution of the effect that raises the degree of expectation, so that the interest can be more preferably maintained.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining interest and enhancing the player's interest in the game by appropriately raising the player's sense of anticipation through production, a variable display is provided. A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state, etc.), and detecting means (eg, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) capable of detecting player's actions. ), a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, an active display area 87AKA1, a first reserved display area 87AKB1, a second reserved display area 87AKB2, etc.); (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of variable display effect processing), and action effect execution means (for example, Effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS053 of effect processing during variable display, etc.) and predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of variable display (for example, effect control for executing step 87AKS049 of effect processing during variable display) CPU 120, etc.), and the specific display means includes a plurality of display modes (eg, display colors corresponding to display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4) including a specific mode (eg, red display using display image 87AKC4). The specific display can be displayed by any one of them, and the promotion effect execution means has a plurality of effect modes (for example, according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3) including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3) The promotion effect can be executed by any one of the above, and the predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined mode (for example, a message such as "Super heat !!" using the display image 87AKE3). (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3), the predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes including the A predetermined effect is executed (see, for example, the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41 in FIGS. 11-12), and the promotion effect is executed by the special mode at a different rate according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 11 -Determination example 87 of promotion effect according to cut-in effect in 13 AK51), the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (see example 87 AK51 of determination of promotion effect according to variable display result in FIGS. 11 to 13). mentioned. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot switch to be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as winning probability (ball-out rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Incidentally, the set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the game parlor attendant or the like can check the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by a staff member of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed in the board case together with the main board 11 . The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. . In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the frame for the game machine opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. Each of the first to fourth display units of the display monitor is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the kind of big win during the big win game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-probability base state or a big-hit game state as a time-saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIGS. 10-1(A) and 10-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. Of these, FIG. 10-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set to the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). is. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to using separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result determination common to the first special figure and the second special figure A table may be used.

When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 ~ Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

In each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) are special figures of "jackpot" assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/1 when the set value is 4). 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, 1/160 when the setting value is 3, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, and 1/140 when the setting value is 4. 1/120 for 5 and 1/100 for a set value of 6). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state (high probability state) than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability is 1.625 times)), and the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value , may be set to a constant value (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same value A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state as "small winning" may be varied. The special figure display result is not limited to a form with a different probability of being determined when controlling the special figure display result as a "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure, and the special figure display result is " The probability that it is determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

FIGS. 10-2 to 10-5 show numerical ranges of hit determination values assigned to "big wins" and "minor wins" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 10-2 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 10-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state. FIG. 10-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 10-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value range from 1020 to 1237 is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range Only numbers within (1020-1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, numbers within the range of the common number range plus the non-common number range will be the "jackpot" assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the setting value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of big hit determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value range from 1020 to 1237 is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, determination included within a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit determination value of 1020 The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is judged as the small hit. As a numerical range of values, a variable display result is determined.

In each display result determination table, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same) be. In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big win game state is determined is the lowest, and the value of the setting value is the lowest. Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (big hit probability: setting value 6> setting value 5> setting value 4> setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of the random number MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big win, the special symbol wins (big win). It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 10-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the configuration in which a total of six set values, ie, 1 to 6, are provided. Seven or more may be sufficient. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increasing the probability of a big win, making it easier to determine a specific kind of big win, etc.). It may be arranged such that the smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form that does not change, but the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when the playability is changed according to the set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characterizing portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 10-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. ) and initial settings such as settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, the process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A , the process proceeds to step S3A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A, If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), set value confirmation processing (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the game machine frame is open when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off. It is the process that takes place. In the setting value change process, a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, According to the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing the provisional set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the setting value confirmation process, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) while the game machine frame is open. This is a process performed by In the setting value confirmation process, the process of transmitting a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, the display of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), and ending the display etc. according to the state of a lock switch, setting to the effect control board 12 A process of transmitting a value confirmation end notification command is performed.

It should be noted that in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the lighting of the round indicator, the first reservation indicator 25A, By starting the flashing of the second holding display 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player, a game hall staff member, or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing or setting the set value. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being checked. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed). (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as other processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by a cold start or restored to the state before the power failure (started by a hot start) depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, for example. ), perform the corresponding processing (step S10A), and terminate the processing within the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in addresses other than the first address (F000) where the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. processing takes place. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) to FXXX) may be cleared.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Also, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or that the power has been restored from a power failure during setting change, A process of transmitting an error designation command according to the abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Furthermore, the first display section, second display section, third display section, and fourth display that constitute the display monitor are used to notify (error notification) that a set value abnormal error has occurred or that power has been restored from a power failure during setting change. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the sections. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.). The monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may perform error occurrence notification.

In the processing within the game control main processing, after it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A, when it is determined that the open sensor is OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being detected, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the set value can be stored in a identifiable manner. can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. , the staff of the game hall or the like can recognize from both the front side and the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the electricity has recovered from the power failure during the change of the setting value. . In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or the recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value. become.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1 has a hit determination value of 1020 to 1237, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are continuous. Since it is set to be a numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value. It suffices to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range of up to. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

The numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided, random It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big-hit determination value (whether or not to control to the big-hit game state) multiple times. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time-saving state, or a variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit determination Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability variable state It is sufficient to judge no. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of determination values included in the numerical range is 655, which is about double). On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It suffices to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within a numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. When it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. It should be determined whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the big-hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small-hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 87AK to 89AK)
FIG. 11A shows a configuration example 87AKP0 of screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. In the configuration example 87AKP0, the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 87AKA1, a first reserved display area 87AKB1, and a second reserved display area 87AKB2. In the active display area 87AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first reserved display area 87AKB1, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of first reserved memories. In the second reserved display area 87AKB2, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of second reserved memories. Thus, in the active display area 87AKA1, the first reserved display area 87AKB1, and the second reserved display area 87AKB2, active display and reserved display, which are specific displays, can be performed based on the information regarding the variable display. The pending display in the first pending display area 87AKB1 is also called "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 87AKB2 is also called "second pending display".

The display area of the first pending display area 87AKB1 may be configured so that the first pending display is performed, for example, aligned to the right. The first reservation display area 87AKB1 is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the first reservation storage number "4". , "4". Based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole, the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is increased. At this time, if there is no other first pending display in the first pending display area 87AKB1, at the right end display portion corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first pending display area 87AKB1, the first pending As a pending display corresponding to the number of memories, a display of an effect image showing a new first pending display is added. If there is another first reserved display in the first reserved display area 87AKB1, a non-displayed display located to the left of the display portion where the other first reserved display is being performed in the first reserved display area 87AKB1 At the site (the display site corresponding to any of the pending numbers "2" to "4"), as the pending display corresponding to the increased first pending memory number, the effect image showing the new first pending display Add display. When there are one or a plurality of first reserved displays in the first reserved display area 87AKB1, when a new first special game is started, the reserved number corresponds to "1" in the first reserved display area 87AKB1. At the display part on the right end, the first pending display is erased (digested). At this time, if there are first pending displays in the display parts corresponding to other pending numbers "2" to "4", those first pending displays are moved to the right in the direction of the erased display part ( shift). Thus, in the first pending display area 87AKB1, a first pending display corresponding to the first special figure game whose execution is pending without being started yet can be displayed according to the number of first pending memories. Also, in the first pending display area 87AKB1, by displaying the effect image that is the pending display image, the first pending display included in the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started is displayed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. It can be carried out.

The second pending display area 87AKB2 may be configured so that, for example, the second pending display is left aligned. The second reservation display area 87AKB2 is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the second reservation storage number "4", and the reservation numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the left end. , "4". The second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is increased based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole. At this time, if there is no other second pending display in the second pending display area 87AKB2, at the display part at the left end corresponding to the pending number "1" in the second pending display area 87AKB2, the increased second pending As a pending display corresponding to the number of memories, a display of an effect image showing a new second pending display is added. If there is another second reserved display in the second reserved display area 87AKB2, a display that is in a non-display state on the right side of the display part where the other second reserved display is performed in the second reserved display area 87AKB2. At the site (the display site corresponding to any of the pending numbers "2" to "4"), as the pending display corresponding to the increased second pending memory number, a production image showing a new second pending display Add display. When there is one or a plurality of second pending displays in the second pending display area 87AKB2, when a new second special game is started, the pending number corresponds to "1" in the second pending display area 87AKB2. At the display part on the left end, the second pending display is erased (digested). At this time, if there are second pending displays in the display parts corresponding to other pending numbers "2" to "4", those second pending displays are moved to the left in the direction of the erased display part ( shift). Thus, in the second pending display area 87AKB2, a second pending display corresponding to the second special figure game whose execution has been suspended without being started yet can be displayed according to the number of second pending memories. Further, in the second pending display area 87AKB2, by displaying the effect image that is the pending display image, the second pending display included in the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started is displayed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. It can be carried out.

In the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the first special game, active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (digested) in the first reserved display area 87AKB1 is started. Also, in the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the second special game, active display corresponding to the second suspended display erased (digested) in the second suspended display area 87AKB2 is started. In the active display area 87AKA1, by displaying an effect image that becomes an active display image, active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be performed as a corresponding display regarding the variable display. The first pending display, the second pending display, and the active display may have the same color and pattern. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first pending display and the second pending display. There may be. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first reserved display and the second reserved display due to the execution of the active display change effect.

On the screen of the image display device 5 in the configuration example 87AKP0, an active display area 87AKA1 is arranged between the first reserved display area 87AKB1 and the second reserved display area 87AKB2. On the other hand, the active display area 87AKA1, the first reserved display area 87AKB1, and the second reserved display area 87AKB2 may be arranged at arbitrary positions on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. For example, the first reserved display area 87AKB1 and the second reserved display area 87AKB2 may be replaced without changing the arrangement of the active display area 87AKA1.

In the characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK, as an example of the notice effect, the notice effect of "active display change" is executed. The notice effect of "active display change" changes the display mode of the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 in response to the variable display whose execution has started, and execution starts at a rate corresponding to the display mode after the change. The display result of the displayed variable display becomes "big win" and it is announced that the game state will be controlled to the big win game state. In the "active display change" notice effect, the display color of the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed is a specific color (e.g., blue, green, red, etc.) different from the predetermined color (e.g., white) during normal operation. ). It suffices if it is possible to suggest that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state at a predetermined rate by a change in the display mode that the player can recognize, such as the display color of the active display. In the case of active display using effect images showing display patterns, messages, characters, etc., any display mode may be changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode. The notice effect of "active display change" is also called change notice or change effect.

The suggestion effect is executed before the notice effect of "active display change" as the change effect is executed. The suggestive effect suggests that the display mode of the active display will change. After the suggestive effect is executed, the change effect may be executed, or the change effect may not be executed. Thus, after the suggestive effect is executed, there are cases where the display mode of the active display changes and cases where the display mode of the active display does not change. The suggestive production includes fake suggestive production. After execution of the false suggestion effect, the display mode of the active display does not change because the change effect is not executed. It is sufficient that the suggestive effect can be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether the change effect is executed or the false suggestive effect is not executed. As a result, the player may be prevented from determining whether or not the display mode of the active display changes until the suggestive effect is finished. While the suggestive effect is executed before the change effect, there is a case where the change effect is not executed after the suggestive effect is executed. there is The suggestive effect may be executed in an effect mode that temporarily changes the display mode of the active display, such as displaying a character effect image in the active display area 87AKA1. However, the display mode of the active display changed by the suggestion effect is different from the display mode of the active display changed by the change effect, and the change in the display mode is undetermined. It is only necessary that it is impossible or difficult to determine, during execution of the suggestive effect, whether the change to the specific color display different from the white display is confirmed.

FIG. 11-2 shows a configuration example of variation patterns relating to characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. These variation patterns may be prepared in advance so as to be usable in place of some or all of the variation patterns in the above embodiments, or together with some or all of the variation patterns in the above embodiments. A plurality of variation patterns differ in variable display mode of special figure variation time and decoration design. The special figure fluctuation time is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special figure to the stop display of the fixed special figure in the special figure games such as the first special figure game and the second special figure game. A plurality of variation patterns relating to the characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK include variation patterns corresponding to non-reach (losing), reach (losing), and big hits. Non-reach (losing) is a case where the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination are displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is "non-reachable losing". A ready-to-win (lose) is a case in which fixed decorative patterns of a ready-to-win combination, which is not a big hit combination, are stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is "ready-to-lose". A big hit is a case in which the fixed decorative symbols of the big winning combination are displayed in a stationary manner as the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is "big hit". A variation pattern corresponding to non-reach (loss) is a non-reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to reach (loss) is a reach variation pattern, and a variation pattern corresponding to a big win is a big win variation pattern. The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are also collectively referred to as a loss fluctuation pattern. In the reach fluctuation pattern and the jackpot fluctuation pattern, after executing the reach production that becomes normal reach, the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed "Normal" fluctuation pattern, and after executing the reach production that becomes normal reach, it becomes super reach It includes a "super" variation pattern in which the display result of the variable display is stopped after the ready-to-win effect is executed to develop into a ready-to-win effect and become a super-reach effect. The ready-to-reach performances that become super ready-to-win include super-A and super-B ready-to-reach performances having different performance modes.

FIG. 11-3 shows an example of determining the variation pattern. Variation pattern determination example, big hit variation pattern determination example 87AK01 shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 shown in FIG. B2) includes a loss variation pattern determination example (during time saving) 87AK03. The big hit variation pattern determination example 87AK01 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "big hit". Loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" in the normal state where the time saving control is not performed. Loss variation pattern determination example (during time saving) 87AK03 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" in the time saving state in which time saving control is performed. In the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, if the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot", or if the normal time when the time saving control is not performed becomes "losing", the time saving control is performed. The variation pattern at the time of big hit or at the time of loss is determined using the selected variation pattern determination table according to the case of "losing" during the time saving. When determining the variation pattern, the numerical data representing the random number value for determining the variation pattern is read from the variation random number buffer. The variable random number buffer can store the random number extracted when the start prize determination process is executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. The effect control CPU 120 compares the random number value for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation with the determination value set in advance in the selected variation pattern determination table. Then, a variation pattern to be used is determined according to the determination result as to which range of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern contains the random number value for determining the variation pattern. In addition, it may be determined whether or not the ready-to-win state is set when the game is “lost” by a process separate from the determination of the variation pattern.

In the big hit variation pattern determination example 87AK01, the number of determined values assigned to the variation pattern of "super" such as variation patterns PA3-2 and PA3-3 is the variation pattern PA3-1, such as "normal" variation pattern Each variation pattern is assigned a decision value such that it is greater than the number of decision values assigned to . On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 and the loss variation pattern determination example (time saving) 87AK03, such as variation pattern PA2-1, the number of determined values assigned to the "normal" variation pattern is assigned a determined value to each variation pattern such that the number of determined values is greater than the number of determined values assigned to the "super" variation patterns such as the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3. As a result, when the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach is executed, the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach is not executed even if the ready-to-reach effect that becomes normal reach is executed, and the variable display is displayed. The degree of expectation of big win (reliability of big win) becomes higher than when the display result is stopped and displayed.

Loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02, the number of assigned determination values depending on which value the number of first reserved memories is 0, 1, or 2 or more Variation patterns with different numbers may be set to include According to such a setting, according to the number of 1st reservation storage, the average variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of a special design or a decoration design should just be made different. Each It suffices if a determined value is assigned to the variation pattern. Loss variation pattern determination example (during time saving) 87AK03, the number of assigned determination values depending on which value the second reservation number is 0, 1, or 2 or more Variation patterns with different numbers may be set to include According to such a setting, according to the number of 2nd reservation storage, the average variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of a special design or a decoration design should just be made different. Each It suffices if a determined value is assigned to the variation pattern. Loss variation pattern decision example (time saving) 87AK03, compared to loss variation pattern decision example (normal time) 87AK02, decision assigned to a variation pattern with a shorter special figure variation time than a variation pattern with a longer special figure variation time A decision value may be assigned to each variation pattern so that the number of values increases. As a result, when the time saving control is performed, the average variable display time of the special pattern and the decoration pattern can be shortened more than the normal time when the time saving control is not performed.

In the normal time when the time saving control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the execution of the special game using the second special figure is started normally and the display result of the variable display is "losing", regardless of the second reserved memory number, the first reserved memory number is The variation pattern may be determined by referring to the same table data as in the case of the predetermined value (for example, "0"). Alternatively, when execution of the special game using the second special figure is started at normal times and the display result of the variable display is "lost", the special figure game is started regardless of the number of second reserved memories. The variation pattern may be determined by referring to table data corresponding to the first reserved storage number at the point in time. Alternatively, in response to the fact that the special game using the second special figure is preferentially executed over the special game using the first special figure, an example of determining a losing variation pattern regardless of the number of second reserved memories (Normal time) The variation pattern may be determined by referring to table data in which the allocation of determination values is different from that of 87AK02. Alternatively, when the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started at normal time and the display result of the variable display is "losing", the "first reservation A change pattern may be determined by reading table data corresponding to the second reserved storage number by replacing "the number of stored" with "second reserved storage number".

During the time saving control when the time saving control is performed, the game ball is likely to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is high. When the special game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure, the special game using the second special figure is repeated during the time saving. There is a high possibility that it will be executed, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. And, when starting the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure during time saving, the number of second reserved memories is 0. Therefore, when the execution of the special game using the first special figure is started during the time saving and the display result of the variable display becomes "losing", regardless of the number of first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories is a predetermined value (for example, "0"), the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the same table data. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined by referring to table data in which the allocation of the determination value is different from that of the example of losing variation pattern determination (during time saving) 87AK03 regardless of the number of first reserved memories. Alternatively, if the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during the time saving and the display result of the variable display is "loss", the "second A change pattern may be determined by reading table data corresponding to the first reserved storage number by replacing "number of reserved storage" with "first reserved storage number".

FIGS. 11-4 (A1) to (A4) show active display examples for characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. The active display can be displayed in a different display mode such as display color. In this active display example, four display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for active display. The number of display images that can be used for active display is not limited to four, and may be any number of images based on any design. The display image 87AKC1 is an effect image when displaying a character representing a coin in white. The display image 87AKC2 is an effect image when a character representing coins is displayed in blue. The display image 87AKC3 is an effect image when a character representing coins is displayed in green. The display image 87AKC4 is an effect image when a character representing coins is displayed in red. In the active display, the display image 87AKC1 is displayed in white with a character representing a coin as a normal display mode. The change rendering includes the case where the display color of the active display is any one of blue, green, and red. Of these, when the display color is red, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the display color is blue or green. When the display color is green, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the display color is blue. Thus, the active display can be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes such as white display, blue display, green display, and red display. Also, the active display can be displayed in a specific mode such as red display using the display image 87AKC4. The active display may be displayed in different display modes depending on the type, size, shape, and pattern of the character, and any display mode of the effect image, together with the display color or instead of the display color.

FIGS. 11-4 (B1) to (B3) show examples of suggestive effects relating to characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. The suggestive effect can be executed by changing the effect mode including the display mode, such as a character. In this suggestive effect example, three display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the suggestive effect. The number of display images that can be used for suggestive rendering is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on any design. The display image 87AKD1 is an effect image when the character representing the coin explodes in the active display. The display image 87AKD2 is an effect image in the case where the character indicating the coin is illuminated in the active display. The display image 87AKD3 is an effect image when the character representing the coin rotates in the active display. In the suggestive effect, the ratio of whether or not the display mode of the active display is changed by the execution of the change effect differs depending on the execution timing and the effect mode. In addition, the ratio of which of the plurality of display modes the display mode of the active display changes after execution of the change effect differs according to the effect mode of the suggestive effect. In this way, the suggestive effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes such as the effect mode of displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3.

FIGS. 11-5 (A1) to (A3) show examples of cut-in effects relating to characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. The cut-in effect can be executed at a predetermined timing during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win after establishment of the ready-to-win effect in which the variable display of decorative patterns is in the ready-to-win mode. In the cut-in effect, for example, an effect image of a character reporting a message is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. The cut-in effect is a ratio corresponding to whether or not it is executed with the ready-to-win effect that becomes super reach, or a ratio according to the effect mode when it is executed, and the display result of the variable display becomes "big win" and the big win game state. forewarning that it will be controlled by The cut-in production is the content of the message by the character, the type of character, size, shape, pattern, color, the type of frame that will be the outer frame, size, shape, pattern, color, the type of effect display, size, shape, pattern, It is sufficient if it can be executed in different rendering modes depending on the display mode of arbitrary rendering images such as colors.

In the cut-in effect examples of FIGS. 11-5 (A1) to (A3), three display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the cut-in effect. The number of prepared display images that can be used for the cut-in effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKE1 is an effect image in the case of displaying a character reporting the message "???". The display image 87AKE2 is an effect image in the case of displaying a character that announces the message "chance!!". The display image 87AKE3 is an effect image in the case of displaying a character that reports the message "Super heat!!". In the cut-in effect, the ratio of whether or not it is executed and the ratio of notifying the message "Extreme heat!!" differ according to the display mode of the active display. In this way, the cut-in effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes, such as the effect mode of a message notified by displaying any one of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3. Also, the cut-in effect can be executed in a predetermined mode, such as a mode of notifying the message "Super heat!!" using the display image 87AKE3.

FIGS. 11-5 (B1) to (B3) show examples of promotional effects relating to characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. The promotion effect can be executed in the final stage of the ready-to-win effect that becomes super reach. By executing the promotion effect, the action of the player, such as the action of tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A serving as the V-controller, is promoted. The tilting operation for tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A may include a pulling operation for tilting the operating rod forward. In the promotion effect, a effect image, which is a V-con image imitating the stick controller 31A, is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. Along with the V-con image, a meter image may be displayed to inform of the remaining period for effectively detecting the player's motion. Along with the V-con image, a character image that notifies the message “Close!!” may be displayed. By displaying such a V-con image, a meter image, a character image, or an effect image including a combination of some or all of them, it is possible to promote the player's action of pulling the V-controller. In the promotion effect, the ratio of which effect mode among the plurality of effect modes is selected depends on whether or not the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the game state is controlled to the big win game state. The promotion effect may be executed in different effect modes depending on the size, shape, pattern, color, and other arbitrary display modes of the effect images for the V-con image, the meter image, and the character image.

In the example of the promotion effect shown in FIGS. 11-5 (B1) to (B3), three display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the promotion effect. The number of prepared effect images that can be used for the promotion effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. A display image 87AKF1 is an effect image in the case of a small V-con display in which a small-sized V-con image is displayed together with a meter image and a character image. The display image 87AKF2 is an effect image in the case of a middle V-con display in which a medium-sized V-con image is displayed together with a meter image and a character image. A display image 87AKF3 is an effect image in the case of a large V-con display in which a large-sized V-con image is displayed together with a meter image and a character image. In the promotion effect, the ratio of the large V-con display may be changed according to the presence or absence of the cut-in effect and the effect mode, or the ratio of the large V-con display may be changed according to the presence or absence of the change effect and the execution timing. Alternatively, the ratio of the large V-con display may be changed according to the presence or absence of the suggestive effect and the effect mode. In the ready-to-win effect that is super ready-to-win, when the player's action of pulling the V controller is detected in response to the promotion effect, the final notification effect that is an action effect is executed. In this way, the promotion effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes, such as the effect mode corresponding to the size of the V-con display displaying any one of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. Further, the promotion effect can be executed by a special mode such as a mode of effect of large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3.

FIG. 11-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop pattern etc. are determined (step 87AKS021). The performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the variable display contents such as the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11. You just have to decide. When the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are set to send the command at the start of the variation of the special symbol. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the performance control board 12 . The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random number value for special figure display result determination. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (losing)", "reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". I wish I had.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is " Lost.” When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is displayed in a stopped state, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". Become. When the variable display content is "unprobability variable (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the big win game state is a time saving state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the variable probability state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the effect control CPU 120 displays different (mismatched) decorative designs in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R as the final stop design. to decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left finalized symbol that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effecting, etc., and uses a left finalized symbol determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to it, the left finalized decorative design to be stop-displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the finalized decorative designs. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for performance is extracted, and the right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. In this manner, the right confirmed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decorative designs. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data representing the random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random counter is extracted, and the medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. In this manner, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the middle confirmed decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 are determined.

When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", the effect control CPU 120 displays the same (matching) decorative design as the final stop design in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R. to decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data representing random number values for determining left and right determined symbols updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect, and uses a determined left and right symbol determination table which is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to the fixed decorative patterns, the decorative patterns having the same pattern number, which are stop-displayed together in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5, are displayed. decide. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. Thus, among the confirmed decoration symbols, the middle confirmed decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 are determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to or from the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may not be a jackpot combination but be a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 displays the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the same (matching) decorative design is determined as the final stop design. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit fixed symbol updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect. Subsequently, by referring to a jackpot fixed pattern determination table prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, The decorative symbols having the same symbol number, which are stop-displayed together in 5C and 5R, are determined. At this time, the normal pattern (for example, even It suffices if it is determined which of the decorative symbols showing odd numbers) and the probability variable patterns (for example, the decorative symbols indicating odd numbers) should be determined as the fixed decorative symbols. In the promotion performance during the big win, after a combination of decorative symbols (non-variable big win combination) that reminds the player of the big win but not the variable probability state is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the game is in the state of the big win or in the state of the big win game. It is an effect that informs whether or not it will be in a probability changing state at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variable (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variable (big win)'', the fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable symbols as the fixed decoration symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", in step 126 AKS011, it is determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a big hit. may be broken. In the re-lottery performance, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and that control to the variable probability state is made, By variably displaying (re-varying) the decoration patterns again and stop-displaying the decoration patterns of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variation patterns, the player can be recognizably informed that the probability variation state is controlled. In some cases, the decoration symbols of the non-probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the decoration symbols are changed again in the re-lottery production, so that the control to the probability variation state may not be notified. When it is determined in step 126AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery effect.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like in step 87AKS021, effect determination processing is executed (step 87AKS022). In the effect determination process, the final display image that is the final display mode of the active display, the change pattern used for the change effect, the suggestion effect, the cut-in effect, the promotion effect, and the like may be determined. Subsequently, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step 87AKS023). For example, the production control CPU120 selects one of the prepared production control patterns (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and uses it as a pattern. set. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns and set it as a use pattern in response to the execution setting of various effects by the effect determination process of step 87AKS022. The plurality of production control patterns include a changing production control pattern for executing a changing production, a suggestive production control pattern for executing a suggestive production, a cut-in production control pattern for executing a cut-in production, and a promotion production. Promotion effect control pattern for doing may be included. A plurality of production control patterns corresponding to variable display of decorative patterns and various productions may be individually determined, or a single production control pattern corresponding to a combination of variable display of decorative patterns and execution settings of various productions may be determined. A production control pattern may be determined collectively.

When the production control pattern is determined by step 87AKS023, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initialization of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit etc.) of RAM122 A value is set (step 87AKS024). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step 87AKS025). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern) determined by step 87AKS023 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

After setting the start of variation in step 87AKS025, in response to the start of the variable display, such as the first pending display in the first pending display area 87AKB1 and the second pending display in the second pending display area 87AKB2. etc. are set (step 87AKS026). For example, when the first special game is executed (started), in the first reservation display area 87AKB1, the display part (rightmost display part) corresponding to the reservation number "1" is erased (digested). , moves (shifts) the first pending displays in the display portions corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4" one by one in the right direction. On the other hand, when the second special game is executed (started), in the second reservation display area 87AKB2, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the reservation number "1" is erased (digested). , moves (shifts) the second pending displays in the display portions corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4" one by one in the left direction. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In accordance with the shifting of the pending display, the storage contents of the pending display data storage unit may also be shifted. In addition, settings are made for updating the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 corresponding to the erased pending display. As a result, with the start of the variable display, it is possible to start the display of the effect image that becomes the active display in the active display area 87AKA1.

It should be noted that when the number of first reserved memory and the number of second reserved memory are both "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize or the second start winning prize, the second A setting may be made to update the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 without updating the 1 pending display or the 2nd pending display. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may start the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 as a normal display mode in the active display, in which the active display is a white display in a solid round shape. After updating the pending display and the like in step 87AKS026, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 87AKS027), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated. .

FIG. 11-7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 87AKS022 of the variable display start setting processing as the effect determination processing. In the effect determination process, the final display image for active display is determined (step 87AKS101). The final display image of the active display is the effect image that is finally displayed as the active display. At step 87AKS101, one of display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 can be determined depending on whether the display mode of the active display is not changed or is changed. After that, the change pattern of the active display is determined (step 87AKS102). The change pattern of the active display is used for a change effect that changes the display mode of the active display. The change pattern of the active display is an effect pattern that can specify the effect mode of the change effect, and it is sufficient that a plurality of patterns are stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 or the like. At step 87 AKS102, it is determined whether or not there is a change effect in order to determine the change pattern of the active display. Whether or not there is a change effect is either "changed" or "no change", depending on the result of comparison between the pre-change image, which is the display mode when the active display is started, and the final display image. is determined by For example, the pre-change image and the final display image are compared, and if the two are different display images, it is determined that the change effect is to be executed. When the variable display is started while the pre-change image and the final display image do not match, the display of the effect image to be the active display is changed directly or step by step to the final display image by executing the change effect. All you have to do is When the pre-change image and the final display image are the same display image, it is sufficient to determine "no change" that does not execute the change effect. If it is determined to be "no change" that does not execute the change effect, it is sufficient to determine no change pattern of the active display. When it is determined to "with change" to execute the change performance, it is possible to determine a single or a plurality of change patterns corresponding to a plurality of timings at which the change performance can be executed.

Following step 87AKS102, a suggested effect is determined (step 87AKS103). At step 87AKS103, it is possible to determine one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 corresponding to the timing at which the change effect is executed. Also, even at the timing when the change effect is not executed, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 can be determined if the guess suggestive effect is to be executed. Next, as a ready-to-win effect corresponding to the variation pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a super ready-to-win effect to be executed in super ready-to-win (step 87AKS104). At this time, if it is determined that the ready-to-win effect in super-ready-to-win is not executed and that there is no super (step 87AKS104; No), the effect determination processing is terminated. When it is determined that there is a super game (step 87AKS104; Yes), the cut-in effect is determined (step 87AKS105), the promotion effect is determined (step 87AKS106), and then the effect determination process is terminated.

FIG. 11-8 shows an example of determining the final display image. In step 87AKS101 of the effect determination process, a final display image determination table is referenced to determine the final display image by extracting a random number value for determining the final display image, and depending on the variable display content based on the random value. Just do it. As an example of determination of the final display image, it is sufficient if there is a determination example 87AK11 based on the determination ratio according to the variable display contents as shown in FIG. 11-8. Determination example 87AK11 includes cases of "non-reach (losing)", "normal (losing)", "super (losing)", and "big hit" as variable display contents for determining the final display image. When the variable display content is "no reach (loss)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" and the ready-reach effect is not executed due to the non-reach variation pattern. If the variable display content is "normal (losing)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "losing", and the reach effect that becomes normal reach is executed due to the "normal" fluctuation pattern. there is If the variable display content is "Super (Loss)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "Loss", and the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed due to the fluctuation pattern of "Super". ing. When the variable display content is "big win", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "big win".

In the determination example 87AK11 shown in FIG. 11-8, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 to be the final display images differs depending on whether or not the variable display content is "big win" and the game state is controlled to the big win game state. For example, the display image 87AKC1 is determined at the highest rate when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)", and the variable display content is "super (loss)" or "big hit". , the decision rate is low. On the other hand, the display image 87AKC4 has a determination ratio of 0/100 (=0%) and cannot be determined when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)". Among cases where the content is a "jackpot", the decision ratio is the highest. Due to the difference in the determination ratio according to such variable display contents, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is the highest. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state is lower than the display image 87AKC4, but higher than the display images 87AKC2 and 87AKC1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state is lower than the display images 87AKC4 and 87AKC3, but higher than the display image 87AKC1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is the lowest. In this way, the active display may suggest that the game is controlled to the big win game state at different ratios according to the display mode such as the display color.

FIG. 11-9 shows a configuration example of a change pattern used for a change effect and timings when the change effect can be executed. In the change pattern configuration example shown in FIG. 11-9(A), change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 are prepared in advance as a plurality of change patterns that can be used for change effects. The plurality of change patterns correspond to a combination of a display image of active display (pre-change image) before execution of the change effect and a display image of active display (post-change image) after execution of the change effect. For example, the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is used when the image before change is the display image 87AKC1 and the image after change is the display image 87AKC2 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-2 is used when the image before change is the display image 87AKC1 and the image after change is the display image 87AKC3 due to the change effect. The change patterns 87AKP1-3 are used when the display image 87AKC1 is the pre-change image and the display image 87AKC4 is the post-change image due to the change effect. The change patterns 87AKP1-4 are used when the image before change is the display image 87AKC2 and the image after change is the display image 87AKC3 by the change effect. The change patterns 87AKP1-5 are used when the image before change is the display image 87AKC2 and the image after change is the display image 87AKC4 by the change effect. The change patterns 87AKP1-6 are used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC3 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4 by the change effect. The change effect can be executed at a single or a plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display of the decoration pattern according to the variation pattern.

FIG. 11-9 (B1) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed in the case of non-reach (losing) corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern. In the case of non-reach (losing), it is possible to execute the change effect at the timing before the establishment of the reach that is the first timing. In this way, when the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become the ready-to-win mode, it is possible to execute the change effect at a single timing while the variable display of the decorative symbols is being executed.

FIG. 11-9 (B2) shows the timing at which the variation effect can be executed when the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach is executed in correspondence with the "normal" variation pattern. When the ready-to-win effect of normal ready-to-win is executed, the change effect can be executed at the first timing before the ready-to-win is established or after the ready-to-win is established. In this way, when the variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win state and the ready-to-win performance of normal ready-to-win is executed, the change performance can be executed at two timings during the execution of the variable display of the decorative patterns.

FIG. 11-9 (B3) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed when the ready-to-reach effect of super-reach is executed corresponding to the "super" variation pattern. When the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach is executed, the change effect can be executed at the first timing before the reach is established, after the reach is established, at the time of super development, and at the timing of the cut-in effect that is the second timing. is. In this way, when the variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed, the changing performance can be executed at four timings during the execution of the variable display of the decorative patterns. The first timing and the second timing may be any timing as long as the relationship that the second timing is later than the first timing is maintained. In addition, it is not limited to these timings, as long as it is possible to execute the change effect at a single timing or a plurality of timings while executing the variable display of the decoration design. In the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern, the display of the effect image to be the active display is started. After the active display is started in this way, it is possible to execute the cut-in effect before executing the action effect in the ready-to-win effect of super reach.

11-10 show an example of determination of change patterns. In step 87AKS102 of the effect determination process, a random value for determining a change pattern is extracted, and based on the random value, a change pattern determination table is referred to according to the final display image in the active display. A change pattern corresponding to the timing may be determined. Examples of determining the change pattern include an example of deciding "without super" corresponding to a fluctuation pattern other than the "super" fluctuation pattern, and a decision example of "with super" corresponding to the case of a "super" fluctuation pattern. It is sufficient if the decision example is included.

FIG. 11-10(A) shows a determination example 87AK21 of a change pattern corresponding to before establishment of reach, which is the first timing, as a determination example of "no super". In determination example 87AK21, presence or absence and type of change pattern corresponding to the first timing are determined according to the final display image in the active display. When it is determined that there is no change pattern, the change performance is not executed. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, since the display mode of the active display does not change from the normal white display, 100/100 (=100%) corresponds to not executing the change effect. Determine without change pattern in the ratio of . When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, the change pattern at a ratio of 100/100 (=100%) corresponds to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the blue display as the display mode of the active display. 87AKP1-1 is determined. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, the change pattern at a ratio of 100/100 (=100%) corresponds to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the green display as the display mode of the active display. We decide on 87AKP1-2. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the change pattern at a ratio of 100/100 (=100%) corresponds to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the red display as the display mode of the active display. We decide on 87AKP1-3.

FIG. 11-10(B) shows a determination example 87AK22 of a variation pattern corresponding to the first timing before establishment of reach and the second timing during the cut-in effect, as an example of determination of "with super". there is In decision example 87AK22, presence or absence and type of change patterns corresponding to the first timing and the second timing are decided according to the final display image in the active display. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, since the display mode of the active display does not change from the normal white display, 100/100 (=100%) corresponds to not executing the change effect. is determined without changing patterns of the first timing and the second timing. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the display mode of the active display is changed from white display, which is the normal mode, to red display. In this case, the combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-1 and the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-5 is determined at a ratio of 30/100 (=30%), and 30/100 (=30%). The combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-2 and the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-6 is determined at a ratio of 30/100 (=30%) without the first timing change pattern and the second timing change pattern A combination with the timing change pattern 87AKP1-3 is determined, and a combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-3 and no second timing change pattern is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (=10%). In this way, the presence or absence of the change effect and the change pattern corresponding to the timing are determined at different ratios according to the display mode of the active display. Also, it is sufficient that the final display mode of the active display can be suggested at different ratios according to the presence or absence of the change effect and the change pattern corresponding to single or multiple timings during execution of the variable display.

In the determination example 87AK21, the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-1 has a determination ratio of 0/100 (=0%). Accordingly, at the second timing, the active display does not change from the normal white display to the blue display. Since the second timing is the cut-in performance during execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is increasing. At such timing, if the display changes to a blue display with a low degree of expectation, it suggests that the possibility of being controlled to a jackpot game state is low, and there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable and lose interest. There is Therefore, at the second timing, it is set so as not to execute a change effect in which the active display changes from white display to blue display. As a result, at the timing when the expectation for the big win game state is high, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the unpleasant feeling of the change performance suggesting that the expectation is low.

In the determination ratio of determination example 87AK21, when the first timing is determined to be the variation pattern PA1-3, the second timing is determined without the variation pattern, so the variation effect is not executed at the second timing. Since the change pattern PA1-3 changes the active display from the white display of the display image 87AKC1 to the red display of the display image 87AKC4, the display mode of the active display cannot be changed further. In this way, before the cut-in effect that is the second timing, in response to the case where the display mode of the active display is the red display that is the specific mode, the change effect is not executed at the second timing. Do not change the display mode of the display. Further, when the change effect is executed at the first timing before the second timing, the display mode of the active display can be changed to red display, so the degree of freedom of the change pattern in the change effect increases. , various productions can be performed. Even if the display mode of the active display changes to a specific mode such as red display at the first timing, for example, if a special effect such as promotion effect is performed as a cut-in effect, the active display will be displayed at the second timing. The display mode of the active display may be further changed at the second timing, such as changing the display mode of to gold display.

FIG. 11-11 shows an example of determination of suggestive effects including a false suggestive effect. In step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process, it is decided whether or not to execute the cheat suggestive effect, that is, whether or not to execute the cheat suggestive effect, corresponding to the timing at which the change effect is not executed, out of the first timing and the second timing. good. At this time, for example, a random value for determining the execution of the cheat suggestion effect is extracted, and based on the random value, the cheat suggestion effect execution determination table is referred to according to the timing at which the change effect is not executed, thereby executing the cheat suggestion effect. It is necessary to decide whether or not As an example of determining the execution of the guess effect, there may be a determination example 87AK31 based on the determination ratio according to the first timing and the second timing as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). In addition, in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the suggestive effect is extracted, and based on the random value, according to the change pattern used in the change effect, by referring to the suggestive effect determination table, a single Alternatively, an effect image to be used for suggestive effects corresponding to a plurality of timings may be determined. As an example of determination of the suggestive effect, a determination example 87AK32 based on the determination ratio according to the change pattern as shown in FIG. 11-11(B) may be used.

In the determination example 87AK31 shown in FIG. 11-11(A), it is determined to either "executed" to execute the trick suggestion effect or "no execution" not to execute, corresponding to the first timing and the second timing. . However, in the case of "no super", since the variable display ends before the cut-in effect of the second timing is reached, it is sufficient to decide whether or not to execute the false suggestive effect corresponding to the first timing. In decision example 87AK31, the decision ratio of whether or not to execute the guess-suggestion effect differs depending on whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, at the first timing, a 10/100 (=10%) ratio is determined to be “executed”, and a 90/100 (=90%) ratio is determined to be “not executed”. At the second timing, "executed" is determined at a rate of 0/100 (=0%), and "not executed" is determined at a rate of 100/100 (=100%). As a result, a limitation is set such that the trick suggesting performance is executed at a predetermined rate in the range of the first timing, while the trick suggesting performance is not executed in the range of the second timing after the first timing. It should be noted that the limitation is not limited to the fact that the trick suggestion performance is not executed at the second timing, and a limitation may be provided as a limit such that the execution ratio of the trick suggestion performance is lower at the second timing than at the first timing. By setting these restrictions, at the second timing when the expectation of being controlled to the big winning game state is heightened, the event that the change performance is not executed even if the suggestive performance is executed is stopped or reduced. As a result, at the timing when the expectation for the big win game state is heightened, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the unpleasantness of the false suggestion performance.

A determination example 87AK32 shown in FIG. 11-11(B) includes a case where the determination ratio of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 used for the suggestive effect differs according to the change pattern used for the change effect. For example, when there is no change pattern corresponding to the false suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD1 is 80/100 (=80%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD2 is 20/100 (=20%). Yes, and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKD3 is 0/100 (=0%). In this case, the display image 87AKD3 is not determined. Therefore, when the suggestive effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the change effect is always executed without executing the false suggestive effect, so that the display mode of the active display can be changed. In the case of any one of the change patterns 87AKP1-3, 87AKP1-5, and 87AKP1-6, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD1 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD2 is 30/100. (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD3 is 60/100 (=60%). In the change patterns 87AKP1-3, 87AKP1-5, and 87AKP1-6, the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4, and the display mode of active display is changed to red display. Due to the difference in the determination ratio according to the change pattern, when the suggestive effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to red display due to the change effect is the highest. When the suggestive effect using the display image 87AKD2 is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to red display due to the change effect is lower than in the case of the display image 87AKD3, but higher than in the case of the display image 87AKD1. get higher When the suggestive effect using the display image 87AKD1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to the red display due to the change effect is the lowest. In this way, the suggestive effect may suggest that the display mode of the active display will change to a specific mode at different rates depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image or the like. Also, the suggestive effect may suggest whether or not the display mode of the active display changes at a different rate depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image or the like.

FIGS. 11-12 show an example of determining the cut-in effect. In step 87AKS105 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining a cut-in effect is extracted, and based on the random value, a cut-in effect determination table is referred to according to the final display image in the active display, thereby creating a cut-in effect. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute a cut-in effect, and the effect image to be used when executing. As an example of determination of the cut-in effect, it is sufficient if there is a determination example 87AK41 based on the determination ratio according to the final display image in the active display as shown in FIGS. 11-12. In decision example 87AK41, presence/absence and type of a display image to be used for cut-in effects are determined according to the final display image in the active display. When it is determined that there is no display image to be used for cut-in effect, cut-in effect is not executed. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, it is determined that there is no display image at a rate of 80/100 (=80%), and the display image 87AKE1 is determined at a rate of 20/100 (=20%). In this case, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKE2 and 87AKE3 is 0/100 (=0%), and the cut-in effect using these display images is not executed. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, it is determined that there is no display image at a ratio of 20/100 (=20%), the display image 87AKE1 is determined at a ratio of 40/100 (=40%), and 30 The display image 87AKE2 is determined at a ratio of /100 (=30%), and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (=10%). When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, it is determined that there is no display image at a rate of 10/100 (=10%), the display image 87AKE1 is determined at a rate of 30/100 (=30%), and 40 The display image 87AKE2 is determined at a ratio of /100 (=40%), and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 20/100 (=20%).

In the determination example 87AK41, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the determination ratio of no display image and display image 87AKE1 is 0/100 (=0%) and 20/100 (=20%). is determined as the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 80/100 (=80%). In this case, a cut-in effect is always executed, and one of the display images 87AKE2 and 87AKE3 is used. In this way, the presence or absence of the cut-in effect and the display image used for the cut-in effect are determined at different ratios according to the display mode of the active display. Also, in the cut-in effect, the ratio of the final display mode in the active display differs depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image. Therefore, for example, when the change effect is executed during the cut-in effect at the second timing, the final display mode of the active display can be suggested at different ratios according to the effect mode of the cut-in effect. In addition, when the change effect is not executed during the cut-in effect at the second timing, the effect mode of the cut-in effect can be suggested at different ratios according to the display mode of the active display.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK41, the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is not determined and displayed because the determination ratio is 0/100 (=0%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1. It is determinable if it is any of images 87AKC2-87AKC4. Therefore, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect becomes the predetermined mode by displaying the display image 87AKE3, the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC1, so it is possible to change the display mode of the active display. Become.

It should be noted that whether or not to perform the cut-in effect and the mode of effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not the change effect is to be executed and the change pattern at the time of the cut-in effect that is the second timing. For example, when the change effect is not executed at the second timing, the cut-in effect display image 87AKE1 may be determined at a high rate. According to such a determination ratio setting, when the cut-in effect using the display image 87AKE1 is executed, the ratio of the change effect not being executed at the second timing increases, and the display mode of the active display is less likely to change. Become. As described above, the cut-in effect effect mode may include a effect mode in which the execution ratio of the change effect is low and the display mode of the active display is difficult to change.

FIGS. 11-13 to 11-15 show determination examples of promotion effects corresponding to the characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the promotion effect is extracted, and based on the random value, the promotion effect determination table is referred to according to the display result of the variable display, etc., and is used for the promotion effect. What is necessary is just to determine a production image. 11-13, the determination example 88AK01 regarding the characteristic portion 88AK shown in FIG. 11-14, and the characteristic portion 89AK shown in FIG. 11-15. At least one of the cases of determination example 89AK01 regarding . Depending on the success or failure of a specific condition related to the progress of a game or production, or according to the success or failure of a special condition irrespective of the progress of a game or production, the case of each determination example may be switched. For example, if the number of executions of variable display is within a specific range, the promotion effect may be determined by the decision ratio of decision example 87AK51, and if it is outside the specific range, the promotion effect may be decided by the decision ratio of decision example 88AK01. . Further, if the production mode is the normal mode, the promotion production is determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, and if it is a special mode different from the normal mode, the promotion production may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01. .

In the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 87AK shown in FIGS. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the display images used for the promotion effect. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and there is no display image corresponding to no cut-in effect execution, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (=80%), and the display image The determination ratio of 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and there is no display image corresponding to the execution of no cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (=30%), and the display image 87AKF2. is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 40/100 (=40%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (=60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (=60%). 20/100 (=20%), and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (=20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the display image 87AKE1 of cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%). 20/100 (=20%), and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (=60%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (=40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (=40%). 30/100 (=30%), and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (=30%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the display image 87AKE2 of cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 10/100 (=10%) and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%). 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 80/100 (=80%). When the display result of the variable display is “missing” and the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 0/100 (=0%). 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the display image 87AKE2 of cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 0/100 (=0%). 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (=90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, when the display result of the variable display is "fail", the determination ratio of the images other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when there is no cut-in effect display image, when there is a display image 87AKE1, and when there is a display image 87AKE2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "fail", and the display used for the promotion effect. The determination ratio of the image 87AKF1 is the highest. Further, in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the display image 87AKE2 used for the promotion effect has the highest determination ratio corresponding to the display result of the variable display being "failed". On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. . By setting such a determination ratio, when the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF3 is executed, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state becomes the highest. When the promotion performance using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is lower than in the case of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than in the case of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the cut-in effect, the promotion effect is most likely to be controlled to the jackpot game state when the display image 87AKF3 is displayed. As a result, even if the player misses the cut-in effect, depending on whether or not the effect mode of the promotion effect is the display of the display image 87AKF3, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state can be increased to some extent. can be determined up to

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in decision example 87AK51, when there is no display image corresponding to no execution of the cut-in effect, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is performed at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is executed. executed. When the cut-in effect using the display image 87AKE3 is executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using either the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is executed. In this way, the display images used for the promotion effect are determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. Also, in the cut-in effect, the ratio of the effect mode such as the display of the effect image in the promotion effect is changed according to the effect mode such as the display of the effect image. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at a different rate depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, even when the display result of the variable display is the same, each of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined according to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. Different percentages. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "fail" and there is no display image for which the cut-in effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "fail", in the case of the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "miss", in the case of the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "fail", in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%). Therefore, when the display result of the variable display is "fail", the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect no display image, the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3 are displayed. Higher chance of being displayed. Similarly, if the determination ratios when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" are compared, in this case, there is no cut-in effect display image, the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3. As the effect mode of the promotion effect, the display image 87AKF3 is displayed more frequently. By setting such a determination ratio, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state can be varied according to the combination of the execution/non-execution of the cut-in effect, the effect mode, and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the cut-in performance and the promotion performance, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the performance mode of the promotion performance. Increased interest in various performances.

In the determination example 88AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic portion 88AK shown in FIGS. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the final display image. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "fail", no change effect is executed, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (=60%). ), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (=40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit", no change effect is executed, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (=40%). , the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (=60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). Regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is "losing" or "big hit", when there is no execution of the change effect and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC1, the display image 87AKF1, The determination ratio of 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%).

In decision example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, the display image The decision ratio of 87AKF1 is 70/100 (=70%), the decision ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%), and the decision ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). be. In the case where the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (=40%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (=60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). When the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (=80%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (=30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 70/100 (=70%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%).

In decision example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, the display image The determination ratio of 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), the determination ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (=30%). be. In the case where the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 50/100 (=50%). When the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (=30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (=20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (=30%).

In the decision example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4 , the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10 %). In the case where the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1 is displayed. The determination ratio is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (=90%). When the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1. is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 95/100 (=95%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 5/100 (=5%). . When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1. is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (=40%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (=60%). .

In the determination example of the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display, the determination ratio of the display image other than the display image 87AKF3 is be the highest. For example, when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, regardless of whether the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2 or a display image other than the display image 87AKC2, the display result of the variable display is "loss". Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 used for promotion effect is the highest. In addition, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing, or when it is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the display result of the variable display will be "missing" regardless of the final display image of the active display. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 used for promotion effect is the highest. On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image 87AKF3 is determined regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display. highest percentage. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is lower than in the case of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than in the case of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the change effect, the promotion effect is most likely to be controlled to the jackpot game state when the effect mode is the display of the display image 87AKF3. As a result, even if the player cannot determine the timing of the change effect, it is expected to be controlled to the big win game state according to whether the effect mode of the promotion effect is based on the display of the display image 87AKF3. degree can be determined to some extent.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the decision example 88AK01, when the change effect is not executed or when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing or at the first timing And the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than when the change effect is executed at the second timing. When the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using either the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is executed. In this way, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. In addition, the change effect varies the ratio of the effect mode such as the display of the effect image in the promotion effect depending on whether or not it is executed and the timing. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, even if the display result of the variable display is the same, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. may occur. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and no change effect is executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (=40%) or 50/100 (=50%). %). In the case where the display result of the variable display is "losing", when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%) or 20/100. (=20%). In the case where the display result of the variable display is "losing", when the change effect is executed only at the second timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%). In the case where the display result of the variable display is "fail", when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%) or 95/100 (=95%). Even when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 differs according to whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. When the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the ratio determined for the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%), and the display image 87AKF3 is not determined. On the other hand, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing, or when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the display image 87AKF3 can be determined at a predetermined ratio. By setting such a determination ratio, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state can be varied according to the combination of execution/non-execution and timing of the change effect and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the change effect and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Interest in directing is heightened. Also, the timing at which the change effect is executed differs, such as whether or not the change effect is executed at the second timing depending on whether the promotion effect is executed in a special mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. .

In addition, in the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, even if the display result of the variable display and the execution timing of the change effect are the same, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined according to the final display image of the active display. Each of 87AKF1-87AKF3 may be determined in different proportions. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and no change effect is executed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (=60%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1. ), whereas it is 50/100 (=50%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC1. When the display result of the variable display is “losing” and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 70/100 ( =70%), whereas it is 80/100 (=80%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC2. When the display result of the variable display is “losing” and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3 = 30%), whereas it is 20/100 (= 20%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC3. When the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10 when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4. /100 (=10%), whereas it is 5/100 (=5%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC4. Even when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", even if execution/non-execution and timing of the change effect are the same, the ratio of determining the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 is different according to the final display image of the active display. . By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state according to the combination of the display mode of the active display and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the active display and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Interest in directing is heightened.

In the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 89AK shown in FIGS. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the display image to be displayed. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and there is no display image corresponding to no execution of the suggestive effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (=80%), and the display image 87AKF2. is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and there is no display image corresponding to no execution of the suggestive effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%). The determination ratio is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 40/100 (=40%). When the display result of the variable display is "no" and the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestive effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (=60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20. /100 (=20%), and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (=20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestive effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20. /100 (=20%), and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (=60%). When the display result of the variable display is “no” and the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestive effect is the display image 87AKF1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (=40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30. /100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (=30%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestive effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10. /100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 80/100 (=80%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90. /100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 0/100 (=0%). 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (=90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the display image other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when there is no display image of the suggestive effect, when the display image is 87AKD1, and when it is the display image 87AKD2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "failure", and the display image used for the promotion effect. The determination ratio of 87AKF1 is the highest. In the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect, the display image 87AKE2 used for the promotional effect has the highest determination ratio, corresponding to the display result of the variable display being "missing". On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode. By setting such a determination ratio, when the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF3 is executed, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state becomes the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is lower than in the case of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than in the case of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the suggestive effect, in the case of the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is the highest. As a result, even if the player misses the suggestive performance, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state can be increased to some extent according to whether the performance mode of the promotion performance is based on the display of the display image 87AKF3. can be determined.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the decision example 89AK01, when there is no display image corresponding to no execution of the suggestive effect, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than when the suggestive effect is executed. be. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using either the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is executed. In this manner, the display images used for the promotion effect are determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode. In the suggestive effect, the ratio of the effect mode such as the display of the effect image in the promotion effect is changed according to the effect mode such as the display of the effect image. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, even when the display result of the variable display is the same, the ratio at which each of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined according to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode. is different. For example, in the case where the display result of the variable display is "miss" and there is no display image for which the suggestive effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%). In the case where the display result of the variable display is "no", in the case of the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestive effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "miss", in the case of the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestive effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "loss", in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%). Therefore, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the display image 87AKD1, the display image 87AKD2, and the display image 87AKD3 are displayed as the display image 87AKF2 as the promotion mode. becomes more likely. Similarly, if the determination ratios when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" are compared, in this case, there is no display image of the suggestive effect, the display image 87AKD1, the display image 87AKD2, and the display image 87AKD3. As the effect mode of the effect, the display image 87AKF3 is displayed more frequently. By setting such a determination ratio, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state can be varied according to the combination of the execution/non-execution of the suggestive effect, the effect mode, and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the suggestive effect and the promotional effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotional effect. Interest in directing is heightened.

FIGS. 11 to 16 show an example of determination of an promotion effect as a modified example. For example, when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is selected from among the determination example 87AK51 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 87AK, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are displayed at a rate corresponding to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. You may decide to either In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKE3, as an example of determination of the promotion effect according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIGS. It suffices if there is a case where the decision example 87AK61 shown is obtained.

In the promotion effect determination example 87AK61 shown in FIGS. Regardless, the determination ratio of display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 ( = 10%). On the other hand, in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image used for promotion effect according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 The determined proportions of 87AKF1-87AKF3 are different. In such a case, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is the same at 0/100 (=0%), while the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1. ), 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2, 25/100 (=25%) if the set value is 3, and 20/100 if the set value is 4. (=20%), if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (=15%), and if the set value is 6, it is 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (=65%) when the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) when the setting value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (=85%). ), and if the set value is 6, it is 90/100 (=90%).

In the determined ratio of the determination example 87AK61, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect to display either the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is set to the pachinko game. It is made different according to the setting value in the machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect tends to be the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the effect mode of the promotion effect changes to that of the display image 87AKF3. The ratio of the mode of presentation by display is increased. Therefore, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the display of the display image 87AKE3, and the promotion effect is the effect mode of displaying the display image 87AKF3, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is advantageous to the player. Expectations, which are set values, increase.

The effect mode of the promotion effect is the effect mode as a predetermined mode in which the message "Super heat!!" is notified by displaying the display image 87AKF3. The rate at which the performance mode of the promotion performance becomes such a predetermined mode can be grasped by repeatedly executing the cut-in performance and the promotion performance in accordance with a plurality of times of variable display in which the display result is "big hit". The player can adjust the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 by grasping the ratio of the promotion effect to a predetermined mode when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is displayed in the variable display in which the display result is a "big hit". recognizable. If the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage, the display result of the variable display is likely to be "big hit" and is easily controlled to the big win game state. Therefore, a player who expects to receive a game value such as winning a prize ball expects that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage. In the variable display of (1), by making it possible to recognize the set value from the ratio at which the promotion effect is in a predetermined mode, etc., the desire to play is enhanced.

Even if there is no display image used for the cut-in effect, or if the display image 87AKE1 or 87AKE2 is used, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are displayed according to the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. may be determined differently. Even when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may differ according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 becomes a set value with a higher degree of advantage for the player. may According to such a setting, after the display image 87AKF3 is displayed, the display result of the variable display is more likely to be "failed" after the promotion effect in the predetermined mode (large V-con display) with high expectation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a highly advantageous set value. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "losing", it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the set value, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Of the determination example 88AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 88AK, for example, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 The determined ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may differ depending on the situation. For example, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and when the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4, when the display result of the variable display is "loss", the pachinko game machine 1 Regardless of the set values, the determination ratio of display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 10. /100 (=10%). On the other hand, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image 87AKF1 is displayed. is the same at 0/100 (=0%). 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 3, 25/100 (=25%) if the set value is 4, and 20/100 (=20%) if the set value is 4. If the value is 5, it may be 15/100 (=15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (=85%). ), and if the set value is 6, it may be 90/100 (=90%). By setting such a determination ratio, for example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect is likely to be the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the effect mode of the promotion effect is increased. The ratio of the effect mode to the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 is increased. Therefore, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4 by executing the change effect at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. , the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is an advantageous set value for the player increases. In addition, if the player can grasp the rate at which the promotion effect is in a predetermined mode by repeatedly executing the changing effect and the promotion effect with a plurality of variable displays in which the display result is "big hit", the pachinko game machine 1 Since the set value in can be recognized, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Note that even when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4 among the cases where the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect is performed according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the display may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may differ according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 becomes a set value with a higher degree of advantage for the player. may According to such a setting, after the display image 87AKF3 is displayed, the display result of the variable display is more likely to be "failed" after the promotion effect in the predetermined mode (large V-con display) with high expectation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a highly advantageous set value. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "losing", it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the set value, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF1 to be used for the promotion effect according to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 even when the change effect is not executed, or when the change effect is executed only at the first timing or only at the second timing. The determination ratio of 87AKF3 may be different.

Among the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic portion 89AK, for example, when the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect is, according to the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different. For example, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect, if the display result of the variable display is "loss", regardless of the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 ( = 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). On the other hand, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect, in the case where the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is the same at 0/100 (=0%). The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2, and 3 If the If the set value is 6, it may be 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (=85%). ), and if the set value is 6, it may be 90/100 (=90%). By setting such a determination ratio, for example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect is likely to be the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the effect mode of the promotion effect is increased. The ratio of the effect mode to the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 is increased. Therefore, when the effect mode of the suggestive effect is the display of the display image 87AKD3, and the promotion effect is the effect mode of displaying the display image 87AKF3, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is set to be advantageous to the player. Expectations, which are values, increase. In addition, if the player can grasp the rate at which the promotional performance is in a predetermined mode by repeatedly executing the suggestive performance and the promotional performance with a plurality of variable displays in which the display result is a "big hit", the pachinko game machine 1 can be used. Since the set value in can be recognized, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

It should be noted that even if there is no display image used for the suggestive effect or if there is one of the display images 87AKD1 and 87AKD2, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are selected according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The decision ratio may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may differ according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 becomes a set value with a higher degree of advantage for the player. may According to such a setting, after the display image 87AKF3 is displayed, the display result of the variable display is more likely to be "failed" after the promotion effect in the predetermined mode (large V-con display) with high expectation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a highly advantageous set value. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "losing", it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the set value, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Determination ratio of display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC3 to be the final display image of active display, determination ratio of change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 corresponding to a plurality of timings, presence/absence of suggestive effects and determination ratio of display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3, Of the decision ratios of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 used for the promotion effects, the decision ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effects, the display result of the variable display is "loss" for some or all of the decision ratios. may be set differently according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 has a high degree of advantage for the player as to the ratio of the control to the jackpot game state that is determined in the highly expected performance mode. It may be set so as to increase as the set value increases. According to such setting, after the execution of the high-expectation effect, which is the effect of the effect mode with a high degree of expectation, the display result of the variable display becomes "losing", the higher the ratio, the more the pachinko game machine 1 It is possible to increase the expectation that the set value is a set value with a high degree of advantage. In general, when the display result of the variable display is "lost" after the high-expectation effect of the effect mode with the high expectation is executed, the player's expectation, which has been once heightened by the effect, is variably displayed. , the player's desire to continue playing the game is likely to decrease or be lost. On the other hand, after the execution of the high-expectation effect, as the display result of the variable display becomes "losing", the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage increases. By increasing it, the game interest can be improved so that the player is motivated to continue playing the game.

In addition, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC3 that will be the final display image of the active display, the determination ratio of the change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 corresponding to a plurality of timings, the presence or absence of suggestive effects, and the determination of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. Of the ratio, whether there is a cut-in effect, the determined ratio of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3, and the determined ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect, the display result of the variable display is "missing" for some or all of the determined ratios. , the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be set differently depending on whether it is equal to or greater than a specific set value or when it is less than a specific set value. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 or more, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when the display result of the variable display is "losing" than when the set value is less than 4. A higher determination ratio may be used. Alternatively, for example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it is controlled to a jackpot game state when the display result of the variable display is "losing" rather than when it is other than 6 (one of 1 to 5). A determination ratio of a performance mode with a high degree of expectation to be performed may be increased. When the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6 (one of 1 to 5), the decision ratio is 0/100 (=0%) and a big hit when the display result of the variable display is "losing". When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect mode to be determined may be set to be determined at a predetermined ratio when the display result of the variable display is "loss". According to this setting, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6 (any one of 1 to 5), the display result of the variable display becomes "losing" while the performance of the performance mode in which the big win is confirmed is executed. If so, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is determined to be 6, so that the game interest can be improved so that the player's desire to continue playing the game can be heightened.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this way, within a range in which the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, it may be possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this manner, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this manner, within the range where the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to the setting-suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at a different rate depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, or whether such a condition is satisfied or not. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

FIG. 11-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process as the effect process during variable display. In the effect processing during variable display, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step 87AKS041). In step 87AKS041, for example, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update, variable display It should be determined that the time has passed. Thus, the lapse of the variable display time, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, etc., as long as it can be determined as the lapse of the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

If the variable display time has not elapsed in step 87AKS041 (step 87AKS041; No), it is determined whether or not it is a suggestive effect period for executing a suggestive effect (step 87AKS042). The suggestive effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (suggestive effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process, for example. If it is the suggestive effect period (step 87AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the suggestive effect (step 87AKS043). At step 87AKS043, for example, various commands created based on the setting of the suggestive effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control section 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are lit, blinked, or extinguished. or by combining some or all of them, it is sufficient that the suggestive effect can be executed by a predetermined effect device.

When it is determined in step 87AKS042 that it is not the suggested effect period (step 87AKS042; No), or after executing the control in step 87AKS043, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period for executing the change effect. (step 87AKS044). The change effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (change effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is the change effect period (step 87AKS044; Yes), control for executing the change effect is performed (step 87AKS045). As the change effect period, for example, a period before establishment of the ready-to-win effect, which is the first timing, and a period during the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, may be set in advance. During the cut-in effect at the second timing, it is sufficient if the display mode of the active display can be changed by changing the display of the effect image in the active display area 87AKA1 corresponding to the execution of the cut-in effect.

When it is determined in step 87AKS044 that it is not the change effect period (step 87AKS044; No), or after executing the control in step 87AKS045, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period for executing the ready-to-win effect. (step 87AKS046). Reach production period, for example in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process, it may be determined in advance. When it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 87AKS046; Yes), control for executing the ready-to-win effect is performed (step 87AKS047).

When it is determined in step 87AKS046 that it is not the ready-to-win effect period (step 87AKS046; No), and after executing the control in step 87AKS047, it is determined whether it is the cut-in effect period for executing the cut-in effect. is determined (step 87AKS048). The cut-in effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (cut-in effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. If it is the cut-in effect period (step 87AKS048; Yes), control for executing the cut-in effect is performed (step 87AKS049). The cut-in effect period is after step 87AKS026 of the variable display start setting process starts display of a effect image that becomes active display with the start of variable display, and before step 87AKS052 determines that it is an action effect period. In addition, it is only necessary to set in advance so that the cut-in effect can be executed. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the cut-in effect can be executed after the active display is displayed and before the action effect is executed.

Note that the order of active display, motion effect, and cut-in effect may be changed arbitrarily. For example, the active display may be started after executing the cut-in effect, and then the action effect may be executed. Alternatively, the action effect may be executed after the active display is started, and then the cut-in effect may be executed.

When it is determined in step 87AKS048 that it is not the cut-in effect period (step 87AKS048; No), or after executing the control in step 87AKS049, it is determined whether or not it is the promotion effect period for executing the promotion effect. Determine (step 87AKS050). The promotion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (cut-in effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. If it is the promotion effect period (step 87AKS050; Yes), control for executing the promotion effect is performed (step 87AKS051). The promotion effect period may be an effective detection period in which the action of the player is effectively detected as the promotion effect is executed. In the valid detection period, for example, it is possible to detect the action of the player tilting the operation rod of the stick controller 31A, such as the pull operation on the V controller, based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A.

When it is determined in step 87AKS050 that it is not the promotion presentation period (step 87AKS050; No), and after executing the control in step 87AKS051, it is determined whether or not it is the action presentation period for executing the action presentation. (step 87AKS052). The operation production period may be predetermined in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined at step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process, for example. In the effective detection period after the start of the promotion effect, if a specific action by the player, such as an action of pulling the operation rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, is not detected, the action effect period is terminated. It may not be started. Alternatively, even if the specific action is not detected, the action presentation period may be started when the specific timing for the action presentation is reached. When it is the action presentation period (step 87AKS052; Yes), control for executing the action presentation is performed (step 87AKS053).

The player's specific action detected for executing the action effect may be an action of tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, unlike a pulling operation, such as a pushing operation on the V-controller. Alternatively, the specific action of the player may be an action of pressing the push button 31B. Not limited to those that can detect player's actions, for example, based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target Alternatively, any effect corresponding to the action effect may be executable. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects the state of the detection target. Any configuration that can be detected will suffice. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and an effect may be executed based on the detection result.

When it is determined in step 87AKS052 that it is not the operation production period (step 87AKS052; No), after executing the control in step 87AKS053, for example, the setting in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on this, control is performed to execute other effects during variable display including the variable display operation of decorative patterns (step 87AKS054), and the process during variable display ends.

When the variable display time has passed at step 87AKS041 (step 87AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step 87AKS055). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 87AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so.

When the pattern confirmation command is received at step 87AKS055 (step 87AKS055; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. In the variable display of the decorative pattern Control for deriving and displaying the final stop pattern (determined ornamental pattern) as a display result is performed (step 87AKS056). At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as a wait time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 87AKS057). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step 87AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

11-18 to 11-22 show execution examples of variable display of decorative patterns and various effects. FIGS. 11-18 show an execution example from the start of the variable display, which is the start of the variable display, to the execution of the suggestive effect corresponding to the first timing before the establishment of the ready-to-win state. Figure 11-19 shows that after the change production corresponding to the first timing before the establishment of the reach is executed, in the case of non-reach (loss), the variable display ends FIG. 11 shows an example of execution of reach formation in which the variable display is in a reach mode. Fig. 11-20 shows an execution example of variable end where the variable display is ended in the case of normal (losing), and the second timing from the super development to the cut-in effect where the ready-to-win effect that becomes super reach is started. It shows an execution example until the suggestive effect is executed. FIG. 11-21 shows an execution example in which the promotion effect is executed after the change effect corresponding to the second timing of the cut-in effect is executed. FIG. 11-22 shows an example of execution from the execution of the action effect to the end of the variable display, which is the end of the variable display.

In the effect determination process executed in step 87AKS022 of the variable display start setting process in response to the start of the variable display in the effect execution example 87AKM01 shown in FIG. , the change pattern of the change effect, the effect mode of the suggestive effect, the effect mode of the cut-in effect, the operation mode of the promotion effect, and the like are determined. After the start of variation in the effect execution example 87 AKM01, it becomes possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display will change, corresponding to before establishment of the ready-to-win state which is the first timing. FIG. 11-18(B1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM11 when a suggestive effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKD1 corresponding to the first timing. FIG. 11-18(B2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM12 when the suggestive effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKD2 corresponding to the first timing. FIG. 11-18 (B3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM13 when the suggestive effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKD3 corresponding to the first timing. In this manner, the suggestive effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes depending on which one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 is used. Of the cases in which the change effect is not executed corresponding to the first timing, if it is determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process that the false suggestive effect is not to be executed, the suggestive effect is not executed. The variable display of the decoration pattern progresses. Corresponding to before establishment of the ready-to-win which is the first timing, after the suggestive effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is executed, the change effect may or may not be executed. Of these, when the change effect is executed, the display mode of the active display can be changed according to the change pattern of the first timing determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process.

FIG. 11-19 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM21 when no change effect is executed in response to no change pattern at the first timing. Since the display image 87AKC1 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM21, the display mode of the active display remains white. In this case, the suggestive effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is a fake suggestive effect executed when there is no change effect. However, in the determination example 87AKM32 shown in FIG. 11-11(B), if the suggestive effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 like the effect execution example 87AKM13 is executed, the change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1- Since it is determined to be one of 6, there is no false suggestive effect.

FIG. 11-19 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM22 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC2 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM22, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. FIG. 11-19 (A3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM23 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC3 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM23, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. FIG. 11-19 (A4) shows an effect execution example 87AKM24 when a change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC4 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM24, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the ready-to-win is established which is the first timing, a suggestive effect is performed by displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. After execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1, a display image 87AKC2 like the effect execution example 87AKM22 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, thereby changing the display mode of the active display to blue display. After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the ready-to-win is established which is the first timing, a suggestive effect is performed by displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. After execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2, a display image 87AKC3 like the effect execution example 87AKM23 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, thereby changing the display mode of the active display to green display. After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the ready-to-win is established which is the first timing, a suggestive effect is performed by displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. After execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3, the display image 87AKC4 like the effect execution example 87AKM24 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, thereby changing the display mode of the active display to red display.

In the case of the effect execution example 87AKM21, in the variable display by the non-reach variation pattern, for example, fixed decorative patterns of the non-reach combination such as the effect execution example 87AKM31 shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1) are stopped and displayed. The display result of the display is derived and terminated. In the case of the effect execution example 87AKM21, in the variable display by the variation pattern other than the non-reach variation pattern, for example, as in the effect execution example 87AKM32 shown in FIG. , reach is established. After establishment of ready-to-win, there are a case where a ready-to-win effect of normal reach is executed and the variable display ends, and a case of super development in which a ready-to-win effect of becoming super ready-to-win is executed.

FIG. 11-20 (A1) shows a variable end effect execution example 87AKM41 in which the variable display ends when the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is executed, the fixed decoration pattern of the ready-to-win combination is stopped and displayed. . FIG. 11-20 (A2) shows an example 87AKM42 of super-expansion effect execution in which a ready-to-win effect of normal reach develops into a ready-to-win effect of super-reach. When the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed as in effect execution example 87 AKM42, the decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R may be displayed in reduced size. . Also, a small pattern display area may be arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5 . The small pattern display area is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the lower right portion on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. there is In the small pattern display area, the small patterns are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special patterns and decorative patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is reduced in size as compared with the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and can be displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is partially or wholly common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative pattern. A reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if the identification information image showing the decoration pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decoration pattern. Since this is an image showing a number and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the effect image showing the decorative pattern. In this manner, in the small pattern display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the small patterns that serve as the reduced identification information are variably displayed, and the determined small patterns that are the display results are derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible. In the small symbol display area, it is sufficient to display the small symbols in a simple manner so that the display contents and display results of the small symbols can be prevented from being misunderstood by the player.

Following the super development in the effect execution example 87AKM42, the ready-to-win effect that becomes super ready-to-win can proceed as in the effect execution example 87AKM43 shown in FIG. 11-20(B). After the ready-to-win effect in the effect execution example 87 AKM43, the display mode of the active display is changed with or without execution of the cut-in effect corresponding to the cut-in effect at the second timing. A suggestive production that suggests is made executable. FIG. 11-20(C1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM51 in which a suggestive effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKD1 corresponding to the second timing when the cut-in effect is not executed. Even if the cut-in effect is not executed by determining that there is no display image to be used for the cut-in effect in step 87AKS105 of the effect determination process, the suggestive effect corresponding to the second timing is displayed in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process. When the image is determined, the suggestion performance can be executed even if the cut-in performance is not executed during the cut-in performance at the second timing. FIG. 11-20(C2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM52 in which when the cut-in effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKE2, the suggestive effect by displaying the display image 87AKD2 is executed corresponding to the second timing. ing. FIG. 11-20(C3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM53 in which when the cut-in effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKE3, the suggestive effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 is executed corresponding to the second timing. ing. After the suggestive effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53 is executed corresponding to the cut-in effect that is the second timing, the change effect is executed. At this time, the display mode of the active display can be changed according to the change pattern of the second timing determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process.

FIG. 11-21 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM61 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC2 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM62, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. FIG. 11-21 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM62 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC3 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM62, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. FIG. 11-21 (A3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM63 when a change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC4 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM63, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

After the start of the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach like the effect execution examples 87AKM42 and 87AKM43, at the time of the cut-in effect that is the second timing, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 is displayed as in the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53. After executing the suggestive effect by displaying , in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1, the display image 87AKC2 such as the effect execution example 87AKM61 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, thereby displaying the active display. The aspect changes to blue display. After the start of the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach like the effect execution examples 87AKM42 and 87AKM43, at the time of the cut-in effect that is the second timing, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 is displayed as in the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53. After executing the suggestive effect by displaying , in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2, the display image 87AKC3 like the effect execution example 87AKM62 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, thereby displaying the active display. The aspect changes to green display. After the start of the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach like the effect execution examples 87AKM42 and 87AKM43, at the time of the cut-in effect that is the second timing, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 is displayed as in the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53. After executing the suggestive effect by displaying , in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3, the display image 87AKC4 such as the effect execution example 87AKM63 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, thereby displaying the active display. The aspect changes to red display. After part or all of the cut-in effect, suggestive effect, and change effect corresponding to the second timing are executed, or after the ready-to-win effect progresses without these effects being executed, the action of the player is promoted. A promotion effect is executed.

FIG. 11-21(B1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM71 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF1 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. FIG. 11-21(B2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM72 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF2 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. FIG. 11-21(B3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM73 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF3 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. After the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the small V-con display by displaying the display image 87AKF1 like the effect execution example 87AKM71, and the effect execution example 87AKM72. When the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the middle V-con display by displaying the display image 87AKF2, and in the effect mode of the large V-con display by displaying the display image 87AKF3 like the effect execution example 87AKM73, the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode. There are cases. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, the determination example 87AK51 of the promotion effect related to the feature part 87AK, the determination example 88AK01 of the promotion effect related to the feature part 88AK, the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect related to the feature part 89AK, etc. Any one of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 to be used for promotion effect is determined by a ratio. With the execution of the promotion effect, it becomes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the action of the player. During the effective detection period, it is made possible to detect an action of the player tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, such as a pulling operation on the V controller. An action effect can be executed based on the result of detecting the action of the player during the validity detection period.

FIG. 11-22(A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM81 when the action effect is executed corresponding to the display result of the variable display being "missing". In this case, the display result of the variable display is derived by stop-displaying the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the reach-losing, such as the effect execution example 87AKM91 shown in FIG.

FIG. 11-22(A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM82 when the action effect is executed corresponding to the display result of the variable display being "big win". In this case, for example, the fixed decoration pattern of the big hit combination such as the effect execution example 87AKM92 shown in FIG.

In this way, the promotion effect that promotes the action of the player includes execution/non-execution and effect mode of the cut-in effect, execution/non-execution and timing of the change effect, the final display image of the active display, execution/non-execution and effect mode of the suggestive effect, etc. Depending on other effects and display states, the ratio of the effects mode can be changed and executed. In addition, depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display will be "big hit" and controlled to the big win game state can be varied. Also, the suggestive effect, change effect, and cut-in effect can be executed without detecting the action of the player. Acceleration effects can be executed in a predetermined mode at different rates depending on whether or not execution of effects that can be executed without detecting the player's motion, the mode of performance, and the timing. As a result, by heightening the player's interest in various performances, the player's sense of expectation is appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, some of the features explained in the above embodiment It may be provided with the configuration of. For example, as in example 88AK01 of determination of the promotion effect related to the characteristic portion 88AK and example 89AK01 of determination of the promotion effect related to the characteristic portion 89AK, in a configuration in which the effect mode of the promotion effect can be determined regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. , the cut-in effect may not be executed.

The promotion performance can be executed by changing the ratio of the performance mode according to the presence/absence of execution, performance mode, timing, or a combination of part or all of them in an arbitrary performance different from the promotion performance. For example, when the variable display effect of "pseudo-continuation" is executed, the rate at which the effect mode of the promotion effect becomes the predetermined mode may be varied according to whether or not it is executed, the effect mode, and the timing. In the "pseudo-continuous" variable display effect, after the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started, the re-variable display can be executed once or more than once. When the variable display is temporarily stopped, a predetermined temporary stop mode, such as a pseudo consecutive chance, may be used. The pseudo-continuous chance eye may include a combination of a plurality of kinds of temporary stop symbols corresponding to the combination of decorative symbols. In this case, for example, the proportion of the effect mode of the promotion effect may be changed according to the pseudo-successful chances that are temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the "pseudo-continuous" variable display effect is executed, multiple promotion effects and action effects can be executed before and after the re-variable display, and after each re-variable display. may be In this case, among the multiple promotion effects, the second promotion effect that is executed after the first promotion effect is executed or not, the effect mode, the timing, or part or all of these in the first promotion effect. Depending on the combination, it may be possible to change the proportion of the effect mode and execute it.

Along with the change effect of changing the display mode of the active display, or instead of the change effect of changing the display mode of the active display, the suspension change effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display may be executed. In this case, pending information about the variable display is stored as pending data including a random value for display result determination, and the first pending display based on the pending information is stored in the first pending display area 87AKB1 and the second pending display area 87AKB2. or the second hold display is executed. Then, before starting the variable display corresponding to the reservation information, a reservation change effect is performed in which the display mode of the first reservation display and the second reservation display is changed at a different rate depending on whether the reservation information is specific information. It may be executable. In such a configuration in which the pending change effect can be executed, the promotion effect may be executable by varying the ratio of the effect mode according to whether or not the pending change effect is executed, the effect mode, and the timing.

The production modes such as suggestive production, change production, cut-in production, and promotion production are not limited to those in which the production modes differ depending on the display of different display images for some or all of the production modes, and various production devices are used. Any presentation mode may be different. For example, together with the display of the display image, or instead of the display of the display image, the sound output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the performance LED, and the operation mode of the performance movable member Alternatively, an effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes according to a combination of some or all of them.

The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10"). The display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, which are the final display images of the active display, and the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not they are controlled in an advantageous state. .

As an advantageous state advantageous to the player, it may be controlled to a KT (minor win time) state in which the variable display result has a high probability of becoming a "minor win". For example, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, it may be controlled to the KT state at a predetermined rate (including 100%). In addition, the gaming state that is not in the KT state may be referred to as a non-KT state. Also, the period during which the KT state is controlled may be referred to as the KT period, and the period during which the KT state is not controlled may be referred to as the non-KT period.

In the non-KT state, the variable display time of the second special figure is set to a very long time (for example, about 30 minutes). On the other hand, in the KT state, the variable display time of the second special figure is set to a relatively short time (for example, 5 seconds). For this reason, in the KT state, when the second start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening occurs continuously, the execution frequency of the variable display using the second special figure is in the non-KT state It will be much better than when Corresponding to the variable display using the first special figure and the second special figure, the ratio of the variable display result determined to be a "small hit" is higher than the ratio of the variable display result determined to be a "big hit". ing. For example, the variable display result is determined to be a "small hit" at a rate of 99/100 (99%), and the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" at a rate of 1/100 (1%). In addition, when the variable display result using the first special figure is a "small hit", the period in which the big winning opening is opened is short, so it is difficult for the game ball to pass through (enter) the big winning opening. , and game balls that are substantially prize balls are not paid out. In the KT state, since the execution frequency of the variable display using the second special figure is improved, the frequency of the variable display result using the second special figure being "small hit" is also improved, and the small winning game state is established. It becomes easier to open the big prize mouth. In the KT state, the player launches (right-handed) a game ball toward the right game area, thereby increasing the frequency of opening the big winning opening compared to the non-KT state, which is advantageous for the player. Become. The display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 that are the final display images of the active display and the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 that are used for promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the KT state is controlled.

Various restrictions may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other amount of processing, control, or execution of an action different, and the limit of restriction is the presence or absence, rate, or other amount of processing, control, or execution of an action. It is acceptable as long as the contents are different (for example, whether to stop or reduce, the degree of reduction, etc.).

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 87AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. and a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display, such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first reserved display area 87AKB1, the second reserved display area 87AKB2, etc., and the player's Acceleration effect execution means such as effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display, for example, which can execute promotion effect to promote action, and action effect can be executed based on the detection result of detection means, For example, an action effect executing means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the effect process during variable display, and an effect that can execute a predetermined effect during execution of variable display, such as step 87AKS049 of effect process during variable display A predetermined effect execution means such as the control CPU 120 is provided, and the specific display means includes a specific mode such as red display using the display image 87AKC4, for example, a plurality of displays such as display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4. The specific display can be displayed in any one of the modes, and the promotion effect execution means includes a special mode such as a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, for example, V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of , and the predetermined effect execution means includes a predetermined mode such as a message of "Super heat !!" A predetermined effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes such as messages corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3. Depending on, a predetermined effect is executed in a predetermined manner at a different rate. The promotion effect is executed by a special mode, and controlled to an advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect, as in example 87AK51 of the promotion effect determined according to the variable display result in FIGS. 11-13. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various presentations, the player's expectations can be appropriately heightened by the presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B3), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the action effect is executed by the action effect execution means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect execution means. may As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, it may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display in response to execution of a predetermined effect, such as during the cut-in effect at the second timing in FIG. 11-9 (B3). As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when one of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41, the display mode of the specific display at a different rate depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. may be changed. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed in one of multiple display modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Depending on the setting, the predetermined effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, a setting means such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value change processing of step S6A in FIG. Like the determination example 87AK61 of the promotion effect in -16, the promotion effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 88AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. and a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display, such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first reserved display area 87AKB1, the second reserved display area 87AKB2, etc., and the player's Acceleration effect execution means such as effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display, for example, which can execute promotion effect to promote action, and action effect can be executed based on the detection result of detection means, For example, action effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of effect processing during variable display, and step 87AKS045 of effect processing during variable display that can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display are executed. and a change effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120, and the specific display means is, for example, a red color using the display image 87AKC4 from a certain period before the execution of the action effect, such as the effect execution examples 87AKM01 to 87AKM73. The specific display can be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes, such as display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, including the specific mode of display, and the promotion effect execution means uses, for example, the display image 87AKF3. Including a special mode such as a large V-con display, for example, the promotion effect can be executed by any of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3, and the change effect execution means , For example, the change effect can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings, such as the timing at which the change effect can be executed in FIG. 11-9 (B3). As in the promotion effect determination example 88AK01, the promotion effect is executed in a special mode at different ratios according to the display mode of the specific display. In addition, the selection ratio of the timing at which the change effect is executed differs depending on whether the promotion effect is executed according to the special mode or not. Promotion production like decision example 88AK01 Depending on the effect mode, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state at different rates. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various presentations, the player's expectations can be appropriately heightened by the presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B3), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the action effect is executed by the action effect execution means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect execution means. may As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, at the time of the cut-in effect at the second timing in FIG. 11-9 (B3), the change effect execution means may be able to execute the change effect in response to the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when one of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41, the change effect can be executed at different rates depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. may be As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is not necessary to execute the change effect by the change effect execution means. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed in one of multiple display modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Depending on the setting, the predetermined effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Like the determination example 87AK61 of the promotion effect in -16, the promotion effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 89AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. and a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display, such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first reserved display area 87AKB1, the second reserved display area 87AKB2, etc., and the player's Acceleration effect execution means such as effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display, for example, which can execute promotion effect to promote action, and action effect can be executed based on the detection result of detection means, For example, an action effect executing means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the effect process during variable display, and an effect process during variable display that can execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the specific display will change. Suggestive effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS043, and the specific display means includes a specific mode such as red display using the display image 87AKC4, for example, display according to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 The specific display can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes such as color, and the promotion effect execution means includes a special mode such as a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, for example, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. Suggestive effect can be executed by any one of them, for example, as in example 87AK32 of suggestive effect determination in FIG. displayed, for example, as in example 89AK01 of determination of the promotion effect according to the suggestive effect shown in FIGS. Depending on whether or not, the suggestive effect is executed, and the advantageous state is controlled at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promoting effect, as in example 89AK01 of determining the promoting effect according to the result of the variable display in FIGS. 11-15. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B3), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the action effect is executed by the action effect execution means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect execution means. may As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, it may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display in response to the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means, such as during the cut-in effect at the second timing in FIG. 11-9 (B3). As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when one of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41, the display mode of the specific display at a different rate depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. may be changed. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed in one of multiple display modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Depending on the setting, the predetermined effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Like the determination example 87AK61 of the promotion effect in -16, the promotion effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 pachinko game machine 4A first special symbol display device 4B second special symbol display device 5 image display device 11 main substrate 12 performance control substrate 100 microcomputer for game control 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a detection means capable of detecting the action of the player;
promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect to promote a specific action of the player;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed;
The suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect, and a different suggestive effect from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect. a third suggestive effect in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is lower than that of the second suggestive effect,
The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed,
The third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel and independently of each other during the same period,
The preparation effect execution means is capable of executing the first preparation effect with a first pattern and a second pattern having a lower rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first pattern when executed,
The first preparation effect and the third suggestive effect of the first pattern can be executed in parallel during the same period, while the first preparation effect and the third suggestive effect of the second pattern can be executed in parallel during the same period. and do not run
The third suggestion is higher when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. The production is easy to execute,
The promotion effect execution means is capable of executing the promotion effect in one of a plurality of effect modes including special modes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images